2006 Pontiac Torrent Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10 Towing ................................................... 4-36
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-30 Service ..................................................... 5-3
Airbag System ......................................... 1-53 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-62 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-40
Keys ........................................................ 2-2 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-42
Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-6 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-45
Windows ................................................. 2-11 Tires ...................................................... 5-46
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-13 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-74
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-15 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-82
Mirrors .................................................... 2-27 Electrical System ...................................... 5-83
OnStar® System ...................................... 2-32 Capacities and Specifications ..................... 5-88
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-34 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Sunroof .................................................. 2-40 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-19 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-23 Index ................................................................ 1
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-38
 Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,

and the PONTIAC Emblem are registered trademarks;
How to Use This Manual
and the name TORRENT is a trademark of General Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
Motors Corporation. end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
This manual includes the latest information at the time is done, it can help you learn about the features
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
after that time without further notice. For vehicles together in the owner manual to explain things.
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division Index
whenever it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if A good place to quickly locate information about the
it is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle. an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 06TORRENT A First Printing 2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii
Safety Warnings and Symbols You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We this book. This safety
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things symbol means “Do Not,”
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. “Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”

{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.

Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.

iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
Notice: These mean there is something that could with the text describing the operation or information
damage your vehicle. relating to a specific component, control, message,
A notice tells about something that can damage the gage, or indicator.
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered If you need help figuring out a specific name of
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But a component, gage, or indicator, reference the
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage. following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see • Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words. • Features and Controls in Section 2
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use • Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. • Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

v
✍ NOTES

vi
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Child Restraints .............................................1-30
Manual Seats ................................................1-2 Older Children ..............................................1-30
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3 Infants and Young Children ............................1-33
Six-Way Power Driver Seat ..............................1-3 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-36
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-4 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Heated Seats .................................................1-4 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-5 Children (LATCH) ......................................1-42
Head Restraints .............................................1-8 Securing a Child Restraint in a
Passenger Folding Seatback ............................1-9 Rear Seat Position ....................................1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Rear Seats .....................................................1-10
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-50
Split Folding Rear Seat .................................1-10
Airbag System ...............................................1-53
Safety Belts ...................................................1-12 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-55
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-12 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-58
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-17 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-59
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-17 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-59
Driver Position ..............................................1-18 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-24 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-61
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-25 Vehicle ....................................................1-62
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-27 Restraint System Check ..................................1-62
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-29 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-62
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30 Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-63

1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats

{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.

1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster Six-Way Power Driver Seat

If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located
adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of the seat on the outboard side of the driver’s seat. To adjust
near the front of the seat cushion. To raise the seat, the seat do any of the following:
move the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is • Move the seat forward or rearward by moving
at the desired height. To lower the seat, move the
the control forward or rearward.
lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at the
desired height. • Raise or lower the front portion of the seat by
sliding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat by
sliding the rear of the control up or down.

1-3
Manual Lumbar Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this If your vehicle has
feature, the knob is heated seats, the
located on the front of the switches are located
driver seat lower cushion on the center console
on the inboard side. of the instrument panel
above the shift lever.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turn
increase or decrease the lumbar support. the heated seat on to the high setting. Both indicator
lights will be lit. Press the switch a second time to
turn the heated seat to the low setting. One indicator
light will be lit. Press the switch a third time to turn
the heated seat off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seats to operate.

1-4
Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Recline and

Manual Height Adjuster shown
To adjust the seatback on the driver’s seat, lift the
lever on the rear outboard side of the seat and move
the seatback to the desired position. Then release
the lever to lock the seatback in place.

1-5
 To adjust the seatback on the front passenger’s seat,
lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat and
move the seatback to the desired position. Then release
the lever to lock the seatback in place. If your front
passenger’s seat is a flat folding seat, you must fully
raise the lever to disengage the seatback.

Passenger Seat with Folding Seatback

Option shown

1-6
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you could go
into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

1-7
Head Restraints
Press the button on
the side of the head
restraint to lower it.

Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint

is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

1-8
Passenger Folding Seatback To fold the seatback, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
The front passenger’s seatback may fold flat.
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
{CAUTION: make sure it is locked into place.

If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer

objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information,
see Where Are the Airbags? on page 1-55 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

{CAUTION:
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side
Things you put on this seatback can strike of the seat, up fully and fold the seatback forward
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, until it disengages.
or in a crash. Remove or secure all items
before driving.

1-9
 {CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is

locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Reclining Seatbacks
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in
on page 1-5.
the folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
Rear Seats
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side Split Folding Rear Seat
of the seat, up fully and push up on the seatback.
The rear split bench seatbacks have three available
2. Continue raising the seatback until the seatback positions — folded forward, upright, or partially reclined.
re-engages. Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the
three positions independent of the other seatback
position. The rear bench seat can also be moved
forward and rearward.

1-10
 To fold the seatback down, do the following:
{CAUTION: 1. Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled
and the front seatbacks are not reclined.

If the seatback is not locked, it could move

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.

{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured. 2. Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to
After raising the rear seatback, always check release the seatback.
to be sure that the safety belts are properly 3. Fold the seatback forward to the desired position.
routed and attached, and are not twisted.

1-11
To recline the seatback, do the following: Safety Belts
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the
seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the lever
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
when the seatback is in the desired position. This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, do the belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
following: not do with safety belts.
1. Lift and hold the release bar located under the
front of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
{CAUTION:
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the bar. Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
the seat is locked in place. crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.

1-12
 Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
{CAUTION: reminder to buckle up
See Safety Belt Reminder
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo Light on page 3-26.
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!

1-13
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat

on wheels.

1-14
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The person keeps going until stopped by something.
The rider does not stop. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-15
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-16
Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
Safety Belts
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
if I am wearing a safety belt?
driver does not protect you from things beyond
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety your control, such as bad drivers.
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
even if you are upside down. And your chance of of home. And the greatest number of serious
being conscious during and after an accident, injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater than 40 mph (65 km/h).
if you are belted.
Safety belts are for everyone.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
to wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are Be aware that there are special things to know about
supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts and children. And there are different
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
system ever offered for sale has required the use riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30
of safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Follow
has airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the those rules for everyone’s protection.
most protection. That is true not only in frontal First, you will want to know which restraint systems
collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. your vehicle has.

1-17
We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-18
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
Adjustment on page 1-24.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
shoulder belt.
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

as much protection this way.

1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.

It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
1-23
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
adjuster to the height that is right for you. women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.

To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
After you move the height
adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it up or
down without squeezing
the release buttons to
make sure it has locked
into position.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to
making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-24
Right Front Passenger Position Lap-Shoulder Belt
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-18. Here is how to wear one properly.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same

way as the driver’s safety belt — except for the
following.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate
up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the
guideloop.

Rear Seat Passengers

It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in Do not let it get twisted.
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
who are wearing safety belts. across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike belt across you more slowly.
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

1-25
 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the take belt restraining forces.
shoulder part.

1-26
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

For outboard seating positions, when the safety belt is not
in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing.
The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.

1-27
There is one guide available for each outboard
passenger position in the rear seat. Here is how to
install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the
back of the seatback.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt
into the slots of the guide.

1-28
 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of elastic cord exposed.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
{CAUTION: belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
A safety belt that is not properly worn may near frontal crash.
not provide the protection needed in a crash. Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
The person wearing the belt could be seriously crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-63.
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.

1-29
Safety Belt Extender Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it. Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-30
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the
face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.

1-31
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt {CAUTION:
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, Never do this.
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
page 1-27. If the child is sitting in the center rear lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
seat passenger position, move the child toward behind the child. If the child wears the belt
the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that in this way, in a crash the child might slide
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, under the belt. The belt’s force would then
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would be applied right on the child’s abdomen.
have the restraint the belts provide. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-32
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes {CAUTION:
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes People should never hold a baby in their
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and not weigh much — until a crash. During a
in every Canadian province says children up to
crash a baby will become so heavy it is not
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby
they should have the protection provided by appropriate will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint. in an appropriate restraint.

1-33
 {CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-on child

restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.

1-34
 For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be {CAUTION:
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor The body structure of a young child is quite
vehicle safety standards. unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
with the restraint, state the weight and height hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, regular safety belt may not remain low on the
there are many kinds of restraints available for hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
children with special needs. up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
{CAUTION: This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
Newborn infants need complete support, secured in appropriate child restraints.
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate
infant restraints.

1-35
Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with

the seating surface against the back of the infant.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous the restraint.
flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests
toward the center of the vehicle.

1-36
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.

1-37
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint? Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for in the Vehicle
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on {CAUTION:
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
reduce injuries, an add-on child restraint must be crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
child restraints, the child has to be secured within restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
the child restraint. using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be system, following the instructions that came
sure the child restraint is designed to be used in with that restraint, and also the instructions
a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that in this manual.
it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint.
You may find these instructions on the restraint To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
itself or in a booklet, or both. must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.

1-38
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped
instructions that come with the restraint which may be shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure {CAUTION:
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
child is in it. crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
Securing the Child Within the secured, following the instructions that came
Child Restraint with that restraint.
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the three-point Because there are different systems, it is important to
harness, has straps that come down over each of refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is
crotch. The five-point harness system has two not properly secured in the child restraint.
shoulder straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap.

1-39
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they {CAUTION:
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a seriously injured or killed if the right front
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Here is why: would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.

If you need to secure more than one child restraint

in the rear seat, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint or
the size of the child restraint, you may not be able
to access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH
anchors for additional passengers or child restraints.

1-40
Configurations for Use of Two Configurations for Use of Three
Child Restraints Child Restraints
A. Child restraint A. Child restraint or
using LATCH occupant using
B. Occupant safety belt
prohibited

A. Occupant A. Child restraint or

prohibited occupant using
B. Child restraint safety belt
using LATCH B. Child restraint
using LATCH

A. Child restraint Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure

using LATCH the child restraint properly.
B. No occupant Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
recommended move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
C. Child restraint or
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
occupant using
child is in it.
safety belt

1-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
Children (LATCH) a top tether.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
crash. This system is designed to make installation and attachments.
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the
Lower Anchors
child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
how to attach a child restraint with these attachments There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
in your vehicle. position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).

1-42
Top Tether Anchor Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor

Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
Seating positions with
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
top tether anchors.
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation j (Lower Anchor):
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Rear Seat

1-43
Each rear seating position has exposed metal anchors Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
located in the crease between the seatback and the passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
seat cushion. that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the top
tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for
additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System

{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
The top tether anchors for each rear seating position are
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
located on the back of the rear seatback. You may need
to adjust the rear compartment storage panel/cover in protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
the rear cargo area to access the anchors. Be sure to use could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
seating position where the child restraint will be placed. installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.

1-44
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.

A. Passenger’s Side Rear C. Driver’s Side Rear

Seat Lower Anchors Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat
Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.

1-45
This system is designed to make installation of child 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the Refer to the child restraint instructions and
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle the following steps:
anchor to secure a top tether. 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the 2.2. You may need to adjust the rear
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have compartment storage panel/cover in the
lower attachments or the desired seating position rear cargo area to access the anchors. See
does not have lower anchors, secure the child Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. on page 2-37.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer 2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
instructions and the instructions in this manual. according to your child restraint instructions
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired and the following instructions:
seating position.
If the position you are
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat. using does not have a
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments head restraint and you
on the child restraint to the lower anchors. are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.

1-46
 If the position you are Securing a Child Restraint in a
using does not have a
head restraint and you Rear Seat Position
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
the seatback. system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
If the position you are you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
using has an adjustable child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
head restraint and you instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
are using a dual tether, the child in the child restraint when and as the
route the tether around instructions say.
the head restraint. 1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
If the position you are around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
using has an adjustable will show you how.
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether under
the head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

1-47
 3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock.
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-48
 6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-42.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety
belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger. For outboard seating
positions, when the safety belt is not in use, slide
the latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
near the upper anchor on the side wall.
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.

1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.
Right Front Seat Position Here is why:
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42. {CAUTION:
There is no top tether anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
this position if a national or local law requires that the seriously injured or killed if the right front
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
come with the child restraint say that the top tether back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure
for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 if the child a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
restraint has a top tether.

1-50
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this
position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
will show you how. positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-51
 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
the retractor to set the lock. pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. You may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger. When the safety belt is not in use,
slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near
the guide loop on the side wall.

1-52
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a {CAUTION:
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact airbags. Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for In a crash, an inflating airbag might force
the driver and the passenger seated directly behind that object toward a person. This could cause
the driver and for the right front passenger and severe injury or even death. Secure objects
the passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
away from the area in which an airbag would
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the word inflate. For more information, see Where Are
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the the Airbags? on page 1-55 and Loading Your
ceiling near the driver’s and right front passenger’s Vehicle on page 4-31.
window.
Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat
in your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
the right side of the instrument panel. Do not place of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
cargo in front of this airbag. But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.

1-53
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system: CAUTION: (Continued)

Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed

{CAUTION: to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt should wear a safety belt properly — whether
during a crash helps reduce your chance of or not there is an airbag for that person.
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them. {CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. with great force, faster than the blink of an
They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some as you would be if you were leaning forward,
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
provide less protection in frontal crashes than keep you in position for airbag inflation before
more forceful airbags have provided in the past. and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
CAUTION: (Continued)
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.

1-54
 Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see Older Children on page 1-30 or Infants
and Young Children on page 1-33.

There is an airbag
readiness light on The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
the instrument panel steering wheel.
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26
for more information.

1-55
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
instrument panel on the passenger’s side. and the person seated directly behind the driver, it is
in the ceiling above the side windows.

1-56
 {CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle
by routing the rope or tiedown through any
door or window opening. If you do, the path
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the right of an inflating side impact airbag will be
front passenger and the person seated directly behind blocked. The path of an inflating airbag must
that passenger, it is in the ceiling above the side
be kept clear.
windows.

1-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate? If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags for the reduced deployment is about 11 to 16 mph
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal (17 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate deployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h).
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment or below this range.
events and are used to predict how severe a crash Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help For example:
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle hits a moving object.
vehicle slows down. • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags, airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity. if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
which help the sensing system distinguish between
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

1-58
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags. How Does an Airbag Restrain?
See Airbag System on page 1-53. Side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts. provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
should have inflated simply because of the damage body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. frontal airbags would not help you in many types
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
vehicle slows down. For side impact airbags, inflation is is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
determined by the location and severity of the impact. help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag, side collisions for side impact airbags.
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles
with side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules
in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.

1-59
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? {CAUTION:
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize the When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags air. This dust could cause breathing problems
deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially for people with a history of asthma or other
inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
components of the airbag module may be hot for a the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
short time. These components include the steering safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the but cannot get out of the vehicle after an
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
airbag. For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact window or a door. If you experience breathing
airbags, the ceiling of your vehicle near the side
problems following an airbag deployment,
windows, and the vehicle metal near the rear windows
and tailgate may be warm. The parts of the airbag you should seek medical attention.
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the the right front passenger airbag.
vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

1-60
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
unlock the doors and turn the interior dome lamp on
and flash the parklamps on and off when the airbags Vehicle
inflate (if battery power is available.) You can lock
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts Your dealer and the service manual have information
for your airbag system. If you do not get them, about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
the airbag system will not be there to help protect To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
you in another crash. A new system will include Ordering Information on page 7-15.
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts. {CAUTION:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
Data Recorders on page 7-10. airbag can still inflate during improper service.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
airbag system will not work properly. See your They are probably part of the airbag system.
dealer for service. Be sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing work
for you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-61
Adding Equipment to Your Restraint System Check
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Checking the Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
airbags from working properly? and anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s If you see anything that might keep a safety belt
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet system from doing its job, have it repaired.
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
sensors. If you have any questions about this, is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
you should contact Customer Assistance before Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in does not need regular maintenance.)
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
Procedure on page 7-2. impact airbag covering (if equipped) on the ceiling
near the side windows, the airbag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the airbag
module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag module
and ceiling covering for roof-mounted side impact
airbags (if equipped.) Do not open or break the
airbag coverings.

1-62
Replacing Restraint System Parts If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
After a Crash If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
{CAUTION: New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
may not properly protect the person using it, system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
resulting in serious injury or even death in in this section.
a crash. To help make sure your restraint If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
systems are working properly after a crash, the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
have them inspected and any necessary assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
replacements made as soon as possible. assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
LATCH system parts? and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
worn during a more severe crash, then you need been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
new parts. on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-26.

1-63
✍ NOTES

1-64
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2 Parking Brake ..............................................2-22
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3 Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-23
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4 Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-24
Doors and Locks .............................................2-6 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-25
Door Locks ....................................................2-6 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-25
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-7 Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-26
Delayed Locking .............................................2-7 Mirrors ...........................................................2-27
Automatic Door Lock .......................................2-8 Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-27
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ...............2-8 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-8 OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9 Display ....................................................2-27
Liftgate ........................................................2-10 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Windows ........................................................2-11 Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-29
Power Windows ............................................2-12 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-31
Sun Visors ...................................................2-12 Outside Convex Mirrors .................................2-32
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-13 OnStar® System .............................................2-32
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-13 Storage Areas ................................................2-34
Passlock® ....................................................2-15 Glove Box ...................................................2-34
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-15 Cupholder(s) ................................................2-34
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-15 Center Console Storage Area .........................2-35
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16 Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-35
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-17 Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ..........2-37
Starting the Engine .......................................2-17 Table ..........................................................2-39
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-18 Convenience Net ..........................................2-40
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-19 Sunroof .........................................................2-40

2-1
Keys

{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The children or others could be badly injured
or even killed. Do not leave the keys in a
vehicle with children.

One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Key code information can be obtained by your dealer.
These code numbers can be used to make new
keys. Additional keys that are needed can be made
at any retail service facility provided you have the key
code information. Store this information in a safe place,
but not in your vehicle.

2-2
Have extra keys made. Your service parts department This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
can make extra keys for you. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, • This device may not cause interference.
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. • This device must accept any interference received,
Be sure you have spare keys. including interference that may cause undesired
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system operation of the device.
with an active subscription and you lock your keys Changes or modifications to this system by other than
inside the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send an authorized service facility could void authorization to
a command to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® use this equipment.
System on page 2-32 for more information. At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
Remote Keyless Entry System transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
The remote keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications • Check the distance. You may be too far from your
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
• This device may not cause harmful interference. right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
• This device must accept any interference received, • Check to determine if battery replacement or
including interference that may cause undesired resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
operation of the device. Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.

2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System K (Unlock): Press this button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter one time to unlock the
Operation driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash three times
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors and the headlamps and interior lamps will come on.
from about 26 feet (8 m) away using the remote keyless The interior lights will stay on for 20 seconds or until
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle. the key is turned in the ignition. Press the button again
within five seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.
The unlock button also disarms the content
Q (Lock): Press this theft-deterrent system.
button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter L(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
one time to lock the doors.
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
The parking lamps will
will sound and the parking lamps and dome lamp will
flash once. This also arms
flash for up to two minutes. To stop the panic alarm,
the content theft-deterrent
press this button again.
system.
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the content theft-deterrent system. Your
vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can be programmed
to three different modes. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-13
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering
Pressing the lock button two times within three seconds
or exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing
will lock the doors. The parking lamps will flash twice
the lock or unlock button once or the panic alarm
and the horn chirps.
button twice.

2-4
Matching Transmitter(s) to 1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless 2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil
entry transmitter should last about four years. or similar object to remove the old battery.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will Do not use a metal object.
not work at the normal range in any location. If you 3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under
have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter the cover indicate.
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care sure no moisture can enter.
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage 5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
the transmitter. If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing your
transmitter with your receiver. See “Resynchronization”
for more information.

2-5
Resynchronization Doors and Locks
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle. Door Locks
Resynchronization may be required due to the
security method used by this system.
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization {CAUTION:
function built into the system. If your transmitter
is not working properly and you have to manually Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons at
the same time for seven seconds while you are • Passengers — especially children — can
near your vehicle. The doors will lock or unlock, easily open the doors and fall out of a
depending on their starting position. If they do not, moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
contact your dealer for service. the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly
and lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and
can suffer permanent injuries or even
death from heat stroke. Always lock your
vehicle whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.

2-6
There are a couple of ways to manually lock or Delayed Locking
unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door. A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or
liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with
From the inside, use the lock control on the door.
the remote keyless entry transmitter or the power
door lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the
Power Door Locks theft-deterrent system will not arm until all the doors
are closed and five seconds have passed.
The power door lock
switches are located The delayed locking feature can be overridden by
on the driver’s and front pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry
passenger’s doors. transmitter, or the door lock switch, a second time.
The doors will lock immediately and when all doors
are closed the theft-deterrent system will arm after
30 seconds.
To get the horn to chirp if a door was open during
the arming process, you must press the lock button
on your transmitter twice after the doors are closed.

K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press the

unlock symbol.
Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and press
the lock symbol to lock all of the doors.

2-7
Automatic Door Lock Programmable Automatic
With this feature, all the doors will automatically lock Door Unlock
when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P) if
the ignition is in the run position and all doors are Your vehicle is programmed to automatically unlock all
closed. Otherwise, the doors will automatically lock doors when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
if the vehicle is going faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). To turn this feature on or off, turn the ignition to the run
In the following two situations, all doors will lock position and press the unlock part of the power door
again when: lock switch for eight seconds. The horn will chirp once
when this feature is on and twice when it is off.
• The brake pedal is applied, a door is opened
and then closed, and the brake pedal is released.
Rear Door Security Locks
• A door is opened and closed without the brake
pedal applied while the vehicle is moving faster Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
than 3 mph (5 km/h). passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
This feature cannot be disabled. The rear door security
locks are located on
the inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.

2-8
To set the security locks, do the following: Lockout Protection
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear
door security lock label and turn it to the If you press the power door lock switch when the key
horizontal position. is in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors
will lock and only the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure
2. Close the door. to remove the key from the ignition when locking
3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door. your vehicle.
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
To open a rear door while the security lock is on, doors and the key is in the ignition, a chime will
do the following: sound three times. All passenger doors will lock,
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry but the driver’s door will remain unlocked.
transmitter, the front door power lock switch,
or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear
door security lock label and turn it to the
vertical position.
3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

2-9
Liftgate To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter twice or use the power
door lock switch.

{CAUTION: To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or use the power door lock
switch. The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle located in
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO) the center of the liftgate.
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause When closing the liftgate, use the molded handles to
unconsciousness and even death. If you must pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closed until
it latches.
drive with the liftgate open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-25.

2-10
Windows

{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.

2-11
Power Windows Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down feature
that allows the window to be lowered without holding the
switch. The switch is labeled AUTO. Press the bottom of
the switch part way, and the driver’s window will open a
small amount. Press the switch down all the way down
and release it and the window will go down automatically.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the top of the switch.

Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with
The window switches for all doors are located on the the power window switches, to turn the feature on
center console. A window switch for each rear window and off. When the red band on the button is showing,
is located on each rear door. the lockout feature is off.

To open a window, press the bottom of the switch. Sun Visors

To close a window, press the top of the switch.
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down. You
The power windows operate when the ignition is RUN can also detach the driver’s sun visor from the center
or ACC (Accessory), or while in Retained Accessory mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) for greater coverage.
on page 2-17.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on both
the driver’s and passenger’s side.

2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems Active Arming: The system will arm when the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. pressed. The security system light will come on steady
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent for thirty seconds. During this time you can still get
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make back into the vehicle without triggering the alarm.
it impossible to steal. Once the light starts flashing the system is armed.
The system will disarm when the unlock button on
the transmitter is pressed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself one minute
Your vehicle has a after the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door
content theft-deterrent has been opened and closed. If the lock button on the
alarm system. transmitter is pressed before the minute has passed,
the system will arm immediately. The system will disarm
when the unlock button is pressed.
Security System Disable: The system will not arm.

The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to

arm/disarm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4. Your vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can
be programmed to three different modes.

2-13
Content Theft-Deterrent Personalization • To select the security system disable mode,
press the unlock button on the transmitter
To change the mode that your vehicle is programmed to,
once within three seconds. A chime will sound
do the following:
one time to acknowledge that the security system
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC (Accessory). disabled mode has been selected.
2. Press the panic alarm button on the transmitter If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or
slowly four times within five seconds. exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing either
the lock or unlock button once on the remote keyless
3. You must complete one of the following within entry transmitter. The panic alarm button needs to
three seconds to change the mode. be pressed twice to turn off the alarm. There is a
• To select the active arming mode, press the ten second pre-alarm grace period indicated by a
lock button on the transmitter once within rapid beeping. By pressing the transmitter buttons as
three seconds. A chime will sound two times indicated above, you can disarm the system before
to acknowledge that the active arming mode the horn begins to sound and the exterior lights begin
has been selected. to flash.
• To select the passive arming mode, press the If you hear three horn chirps when you press the
lock button on the transmitter twice within unlock button on the transmitter, that means the
three seconds. A chime will sound three times vehicle’s alarm was triggered while you were away.
to acknowledge that the passive arming
mode has been selected.

2-14
Passlock® Starting and Operating
®
Your vehicle has the Passlock theft-deterrent system. Your Vehicle
This light will come New Vehicle Break-In
on for the theft-deterent
system and is located Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
on the instrument break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
panel cluster. if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock® downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with • Avoid making hard stops for the first
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled. your new brake linings are not yet broken
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart premature wear and earlier replacement.
the engine. Remember to release the key from START Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
as soon as the engine starts. you get new brake linings.
If the engine is running and the security light comes • Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn See Towing a Trailer on page 4-38 for
the engine off. However, your Passlock® system is the trailer towing capabilities of your
not working properly and must be serviced by your vehicle and more information.
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at Following break-in, engine speed and load
this time. You may also want to check the fuses. can be gradually increased.
See your dealer for service.

2-15
Ignition Positions 9 (LOCK): You will only be able to remove your key
when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
With the key in the ignition The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless
switch, you can turn it to the shift lever is in PARK (P).
four different positions.
A warning tone will sound ACC (Accessory): This position operates some of your
if you open the driver’s electrical accessories.
door when the key has
not been removed from R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
the ignition. after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in the RUN position when the engine
is running. But even when the engine is not running,
you can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some warning and indicator lights.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If return to RUN for normal driving.
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

2-16
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Notice: Repeated attempts to start your engine, will
cause your battery to drain much sooner. Excessive
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power (RAP) heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
feature which will allow the radio to continue to work 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. your battery or damaging your starter.
Your radio will work when the ignition key is in RUN 2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, rotate the key
or ACC. Once the key is turned off, the radio will back from START to RUN. Holding the key in
continue to work for up to 10 minutes or until any START will not cause the vehicle to keep cranking.
door is opened. Then push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor, while you turn the ignition key to START.
Starting the Engine When the engine starts, let go of the key and let
up on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). between each try.
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is Use the same instructions as stated earlier, when
a safety feature. To restart when you are already starting your engine in very cold weather. It is
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. recommended that you use the engine block heater,
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle if equipped, to assist in starting your engine in very
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into cold weather.
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, parts or accessories, you could change the way the
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
your engine gets warm. check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

2-17
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather {CAUTION:
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required. injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
engine compartment, behind the battery. store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.

2-18
Automatic Transaxle Operation
The shift lever is located on the center console. {CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
There are several different positions for the automatic suddenly. You or others could be injured.
transaxle. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. set your parking brake and move the shift
It is the best position to use when you start your lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily. on page 2-23. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before

starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.

2-19
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever – push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button as {CAUTION:
you maintain brake application. Then, press the
shift lever button and move the shift lever into the Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
desired gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-24. running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is running at high speed.
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
ice, or sand without damaging your transaxle, see while the engine is running at high speed may
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
on page 4-30. covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use while the vehicle is moving could damage the
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. transaxle. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before
shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.

2-20
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or LOW FOUR
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you (L4) as much as possible. Do not shift into
need more power for passing, and you are: LOW TWO (L2) unless you are going slower than
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push 65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage your engine.
your accelerator pedal about halfway down. Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
accelerator all the way down. do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
LOW FOUR (L4): This position is also used for use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower
fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Transaxle Overheating
Here are some times you might choose LOW FOUR (L4) If the transaxle fluid temperature rises above
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): 284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light will flash. See Engine
• When driving on hilly, winding roads. Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-31 for
• When going down a steep hill. more information. When the transaxle overheats it will go
into a protection mode and will default shift into fifth gear
LOW TWO (L2): This position gives you more if in the AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) position, or
power but lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC second gear if in the LOW TWO (L2) position. Continue
OVERDRIVE (D). You can use LOW TWO (L2) on driving the vehicle in either position depending on the
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down required vehicle speed and load. Once the fluid
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want temperature lowers to the normal temperature range,
to use your brakes off and on. the transaxle will return to the normal shift patterns.
Notice: Do not drive in LOW TWO (L2) for more Towing or driving on long hills can cause the transaxle
than 25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph fluid temperature to be higher than normal. If the
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle. transaxle fluid temperature will not cool, you may
need to pull over and check the transaxle fluid level.
You should also check the engine coolant temperature.
If it is hot, see Engine Overheating on page 5-23.

2-21
Parking Brake To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Make sure to release the parking brake before driving
the vehicle.
If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime will activate to
remind you to release the parking brake.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
warning light is off before driving.
driver’s seat.

2-22
Shifting Into Park (P) Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can with the engine running. Your vehicle could
roll. If you have left the engine running, the move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
not move, even when you are on fairly level running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are You or others could be injured. Do not leave
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on your vehicle with the engine running.
page 4-38.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake. parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
by holding in the button on the shift lever and regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
pushing it all the way toward the front of the vehicle. the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK. was not fully locked into PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-23
Torque Lock Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the control system. You have to fully apply your regular
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift the ignition is in RUN.
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave on the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into into PARK (P), as you maintain brake application.
Park (P) on page 2-23. Then, press the button on the shift lever and move
the shift lever into the gear you wish.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake. If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the 1. Turn the key to LOCK.
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the desired
drive gear.
5. Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

2-24
Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION: If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust • Drive it only with all the windows down
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not to blow out any CO; and
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
things that can burn.

2-25
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if {CAUTION:
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
{CAUTION: the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
Idling the engine with the climate control is running unless you have to. If you have
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into left the engine running, the vehicle can move
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under suddenly. You or others could be injured.
Engine Exhaust on page 2-25. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
set your parking brake and move the shift
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
lever to PARK (P).
if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
NEVER park in a garage with the engine not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-23.
running. If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.
See Winter Driving on page 4-26.

2-26
Mirrors Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
Manual Rearview Mirror each time the ignition is started. A light near the
To adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror on/off button will come on to indicate the automatic
to a position that allows you see to out of the back dimming is on.
window. To adjust the height of the mirror, adjust Press the on/off button for about four seconds to
the arm that connects the mirror to the windshield. manually turn the automatic dimming function
To reduce glare from lights behind you, move the on or off.
lever toward you to the night position.
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Rearview Press the on/off button, located to the far left, to cycle
between °F, °C and off.
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
and Temperature Display calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” later in this section.
If the vehicle has this feature, an automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for
minimize glare at night from lights behind your vehicle. an extended period of time, please consult your dealer.
For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar® Under certain circumstances, especially in idle, an
System on page 2-32. increase and delay in updating the temperature
is normal.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading
and the outside temperature will both appear in
the display at the same time.
Y (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

2-27
Compass Variance
Press the on/off button twice to turn on the compass.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’s
compass could give false readings. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will also be necessary to adjust
for compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.

2. Press the on/off button approximately seven

seconds until the word ZONE appears in the
display. The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Press and release the on/off button until the
desired zone number appears in the display.
After approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new zone number will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described below.

2-28
Compass Calibration Automatic Dimming Rearview
The compass may need calibration if one of the Mirror with Compass and
following occurs:
Temperature Display
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for If the vehicle has this feature, the automatic dimming
example), there may be a strong magnetic field mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
interfering with the compass. Such interference may glare at night from lights behind your vehicle.
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic The mirror also has a dual display in the upper right
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. corner of the mirror that shows the compass reading
• The compass does not display the correct heading and the outside temperature.
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
Y On/Off: Press this button to operate the automatic
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the dimming, compass and temperature features.
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
or until CAL is displayed.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle each time the ignition is started. A light near the
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display on/off button will come on to indicate the automatic
reads a direction. dimming is on.
Cleaning the Mirror If the automatic dimming function is off, press and
hold the on/off button for four seconds to manually
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar turn the system back on.
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-29
Temperature and Compass Display To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
Press the on/off button, located in the center, to cycle
on the following zone map.
between °F, °C and off. If the display reads CAL,
the compass needs to be calibrated. For more 2. Press and hold the on/off button for five seconds
information, see “Compass Calibration” later in until the word ZONE appears in the display.
this section. The compass is now in zone mode.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an 3. Press and release the on/off button within
extended period of time, please consult your dealer. five seconds until the new zone number appears
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating in the display. The display will show a compass
the temperature is normal. direction within a few seconds.

Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the mirror’s
compass could give false readings. The mirror is
set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance.

2-30
Compass Calibration Outside Power Mirrors
The compass may need calibration if one of the The controls for the
following occurs: power mirrors are located
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle. on the instrument panel.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading (N for North, for
example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push To adjust the mirrors do the following:
in the on/off button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed. 1. Move the selector switch to the left or right to
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display 2. Press the corresponding edges of the round control
reads a direction. pad to move each mirror to the desired direction.
Cleaning the Mirror Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-31
Outside Convex Mirrors OnStar® System
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved, creating a wider area of
vision for the driver.

{CAUTION:
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
A convex mirror can make things (like other technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
vehicles) look farther away than they really are. to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
before changing lanes. the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms
and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.

2-32
OnStar® Services OnStar® Personal Calling
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
and Sound Plan is included for one year from the date capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections® can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press with no additional contracts and no additional roaming
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor. charges. To find out more about OnStar® Personal
Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in the vehicle’s
Safe and Sound Plan glove box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking of OnStar® Personal Calling that uses minutes to
• AccidentAssist access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert voice commands, you can browse through the
• Remote Diagnostics various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® User’s Guide
• Online Concierge for more information.
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services

2-33
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls Cupholder(s)
0: For vehicles equipped with a Talk/Mute button, There are two cupholders located at the lower front of
it can be used to interact with OnStar®. See Radio the center console armrest and a molded cupholder
with CD (Base Level) on page 3-40 or Radio with CD on the floor of the center console.
(MP3) on page 3-50 or Radio with Six-Disc CD on
page 3-65 for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial”. See the OnStar®
User’s Guide for more information.

Storage Areas
Glove Box To use the cupholders on the armrest, pull the tray
forward.
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the left
and pull the glove box door down until it stops and There are two cupholders located at the rear of the
is fully open. center console. Pull downward on the lid to use
the cupholders.

2-34
Center Console Storage Area A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top of
your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails attached
Your vehicle has a center console armrest with storage to the roof, sliding crossrails (if equipped) and places
area. Use the lever on the front of the console to to use for tying things down. These let you load
open it. There is a removable coinholder and tissue some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they
holder inside. The coinholder can be removed by are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
pulling it up from the console. The roof rack crossrails lock in any position along the
straight section of the side rail.
Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry Press the levers down until the locking mechanisms
something longer or wider than the luggage fully engage to the side rail. Make sure each lever is
carrier on top of your vehicle. in the down position. The crossrail will not slide
when properly engaged.

2-35
 Lock the crossrails to the far forward and backward
location to make sure the load is evenly distributed
on the luggage carrier.
Do not stand on the plastic lower body panel when
loading cargo on the luggage carrier.
Loading cargo on the luggage carrier will make the
center of vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers. This could result in loss of control of
the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-31
To reposition the crossrail, pull up on the end levers To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
on each side of the crossrail to the upright position. check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
This will release the locking mechanism from the crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
siderail. Lift and place the crossrail into the new position.
Press the levers down until the locking mechanisms When the luggage carrier is not in use, store the
fully engage to the side rail. Make sure each lever is crossrail inside the vehicle. If not possible, lock one
in the down position. The crossrail will not slide crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails and
when properly engaged. lock the other crossrail above the opening of the
rear door to reduce wind noise.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage your vehicle. When loading cargo,
tie it to the crossrail and against the siderail.

2-36
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
Your vehicle may be equipped with an adjustable
panel/cargo cover feature. The panel/cargo cover
can be adjusted into three positions.

To use the panel in the lower position, do the following:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
lower guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock it
in place.
The panel can be used in this position if you need
additional space above the panel. Place the cargo
There is a flip panel towards the front of the cargo on top of the panel in this position.
cover. You may have to flip this panel upward in
order to gain access to the cargo cover.

2-37
 To use the panel in the upper position, do the following:
{CAUTION: 1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
top guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
If you were to carry things on the adjustable
panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover) or 3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of
center positions, during a sudden vehicle the panel to lock it in place.
movement or a crash, those things could be This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area.
thrown around in the vehicle. You or others The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic side
could be injured. When it is in the upper or up. The panel may also be used as a table in this
center position, always secure any cargo on position. See “Table” following for more information.
the floor beneath the panel/cover.

To use the panel in the center position, do the following:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into the
middle guides.
2. Slide the panel forward.
3. Press down and pull rearward on the back of
the panel to lock it in place.
The panel can be used in this position when you have
to place a flat or spare tire in the rear cargo area.

2-38
Table To set up the table, do the following:
1. With the adjustable panel in the upper position
pull rearward to position it for use as a table.
The plastic side should be up.
2. Rotate the knob to release the leg from the plastic
side of the table and rotate the leg outward.
3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at
the rear edge of the vehicle.
Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the
liftgate lock striker.
Notice: Driving with the panel extended into
the table position could damage your vehicle.
Always have the panel in the stored position
while you are driving.
Notice: Placing hot items on the surface of the
table could damage it. Always be sure that the
items that are placed on the surface of the table
are of moderate temperature.
Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel that also
functions as a table. The maximum load for the table There are four hooks located on the table that can
is 100 lbs. distributed (45 kg). be used for grocery bags.

2-39
Convenience Net To express-open the
sunroof glass panel and
Your vehicle may have a rear compartment net sunshade, press the switch
to prevent items from rolling under the rear seat. rearward and release it.
There may also be four convenience net tie-downs.
Two tie-downs are located on the side trim just
behind the rear seat and the other two are located
on the floor at the rear of the cargo area.

Sunroof
If the vehicle has an express-open sunroof, the controls
to operate it are located on the headliner above the To stop the sunroof before it is completely open, press
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN or ACC the switch rearward again. The sunshade cannot be
to operate the sunroof. closed with the sunroof open. To close the sunroof,
press forward and hold the switch until the sunroof
stops, lifts and seals at the back of the sunroof glass.
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down on the
front of the switch. Push up on the front of the switch
to close it.

2-40
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Climate Control System .................................3-19
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22
Horn .............................................................3-6 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-22
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8 Tachometer .................................................3-25
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8 Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-26
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-26
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10 Battery Warning Light ....................................3-27
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28
Headlamps ..................................................3-14 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-29
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-30
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-14 Low Traction Light ........................................3-30
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-31
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-31
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32
Dome Lamp .................................................3-16 Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-35
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-17 Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-36
Map Lamps .................................................3-17 Security Light ...............................................3-36
Cargo Lamp .................................................3-17 Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-36
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18 Highbeam On Light .......................................3-37
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-18 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-19 Indicator Light ...........................................3-37

3-1
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Gate Ajar Light .............................................3-37 Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-79
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-37 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-79
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-38 Radio Reception ...........................................3-80
Audio System(s) .............................................3-38 Care of Your CDs .........................................3-80
Setting the Time ...........................................3-40 Care of the CD Player ...................................3-81
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-40 Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-81
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-50 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-81
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-65 Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-81

3-2
✍ NOTES

3-3
Instrument Panel Overview

3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power Mirrors J. Fog Lamps Button. See Fog Lamps on page 3-15.
on page 2-31 K. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-38.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn L. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-34.
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
M. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
C. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
N. Tilt Wheel. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-24. O. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). P. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-16.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-79. Q. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield System on page 3-19.
Wipers on page 3-8. R. Heated Seats Buttons. See Heated Seats
G. Traction Control System Button. See Traction on page 1-4.
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. S. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P)
H. Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22. on page 2-23.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 3-6.

3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. turn the flashers off.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. signals will not work.
The hazard warning
flasher button is Other Warning Devices
located in the center If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
of the instrument panel. at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

Horn
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in wheel pad to sound the horn.
the ignition switch.

3-6
Tilt Wheel Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel that allows you to adjust
the steering wheel.

The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following:
• GTurn and Lane-Change Signals.
See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• OExterior Lamps.
See Headlamps on page 3-14.
• 53Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
The lever to tilt the steering wheel is located on the See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
left side of the steering column. page 3-8.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and push • Flash-to-Pass.
the lever down. Then, move the steering wheel See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.
to a comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly
to lock the column in place.

3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
two downward (for left) positions. These positions high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. towards you. Then release it.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or When the high beams
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return are on, this light on
automatically. the instrument panel
An arrow on the cluster will also be on.
instrument panel
cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the lane change. The lever will return by itself when you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
you release it. release the lever to turn them off.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and Windshield Wipers
other drivers won’t see your turn signal. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit become damaged, install new blades or blade inserts.
Breakers on page 5-83 and for burned-out bulbs. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-45.

3-8
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. The lever on the right side of the steering column
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down. operates the windshield wipers. Push up or pull down
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. on the lever to place it in one of the following positions.

MIST or 8(Mist): Pull the lever down and release

it for a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to
its original position. For more cycles, hold the lever
down before releasing it.

OFF or 9(Off): Move the lever to this position to

turn off the wipers.

INT or & (Intermittent): Move the lever to this

position to set a delay between wipes. To set for a shorter
or longer delay between wipes, turn the band with the
United States arrow pointing to the numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the
most frequent movement; select 1 for the least frequent.

LO or OO (Low): Move the lever to this position

for slow, steady wiping cycles.

HI or OOOO (High): Move the lever to this

position for rapid wiping cycles.

Canada

3-9
Windshield Washer Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The band on the wiper lever with the smaller arrow
operates the rear wiper/washer.
{CAUTION:
9(Off): Turn the band to this position to turn off
In freezing weather, do not use your washer the rear wiper.
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
Z (Rear Wiper): Turn the band with the smaller
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
arrow to this position to turn on the rear wiper. To set
blocking your vision. for a shorter or longer delay between wipes, turn
the other band with the larger arrow pointing to the
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to operate numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the most frequent
the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will squirt onto movement; select 1 for the least frequent. The band
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles with the arrow pointing to the numbers (1, 2, or 3) will
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, pull affect both the front and rear wipers if they are on at
the lever toward you and hold it there. the same time.

Y (Wash): Turn and hold the band in this position

to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The rear wiper
will also come on. Release the band when enough
fluid has been sprayed on the window. The rear wiper
will run a few additional times after you release it.

3-10
Cruise Control Setting Cruise Control
If your vehicle is equipped with cruise control, you
can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or {CAUTION:
more without keeping your foot on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does
not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h). If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
{CAUTION: You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
Cruise control can be dangerous where you want to use cruise control.
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads The cruise control
or in heavy traffic. buttons are located
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery on the steering wheel.
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.

J (On/Off): Press this symbol to turn the cruise

control system on and off.

3-11
RES+ (Resume): Press this symbol to resume a Resuming a Set Speed
set speed and to accelerate the speed.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
SET− (Set): Press this symbol to set a speed and speed and then you apply the brakes. This, of course,
to decrease the speed. disengages the cruise control. The cruise symbol in the
instrument panel cluster will also go out indicating cruise
To set a speed do the following:
is no longer engaged. To return to your previously set
1. Press the on/off symbol to turn cruise control on. speed, you do not need to go through the set process
The indicator light on the button will come on. again. Once at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can press the RES+ symbol briefly.
2. Get to the speed you want.
This will take you back up to your previously chosen
3. Press the SET− symbol and release it. speed and stay there.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Increasing Speed While Using
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control Cruise Control
shuts off.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control
System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise • If the cruise control system is already engaged,
control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control press the RES+ symbol. Hold it there until you
System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road conditions allow, get up to the speed you want, and then release
the cruise control can be used again. the button.
• To increase your speed in very small amounts,
press the RES+ symbol briefly and then release
it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-12
Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills
Cruise Control How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
If the cruise control system is already engaged, upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
• Push and hold the SET− symbol until you reach on the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehicle’s
the lower speed you want, then release it. speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the shift to a lower gear to keep your vehicle’s speed
SET− symbol briefly. Each time you do this, you down. Of course, applying the brakes ends cruise
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control Ending Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will brake pedal.
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. Stepping on the brake will end the current cruise control
However, if you use the accelerator to increase the session only. Press the cruise on/off button to turn off
vehicle’s speed for approximately 60 seconds, cruise the system completely.
control will disengage.
If the driver takes over the acceleration pedal for more
than sixty seconds, cruise control will shut off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-13
Headlamps Headlamps on Reminder
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
signal/multifunction lever. lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following positions: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Turn the control to day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode. conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
Automatic mode will turn the exterior lamps on and periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
off depending upon how much light is available outside daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
of the vehicle. first sold in Canada.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following conditions are met:
the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp band is in the automatic position,
• Taillamps
• the transaxle is not in PARK (P),
• License Plate Lamps
• the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
• Instrument Panel Lights
• the parking brake is released.
53(Headlamps): Turning the control to this When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
position turns on the headlamps, together with the on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
previously listed lamps and lights. and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel
will not be lit up either.

3-14
When you turn the exterior lamp band to the headlamp Fog Lamps
position, your low-beam headlamps will come on.
The other lamps that come on with your headlamps If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
will also come on. better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular lamps
The button for your fog
will go off, and your low-beam headlamps will come
lamps is located in the
on to the reduced brightness.
instrument panel above
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift the radio.
lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until you
move the shift lever out of PARK (P).
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
Automatic Headlamp System When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps
control is in the automatic position, the headlamps A light on the button will come on when the fog lamps
will come on automatically. See Headlamps on are on. Fog lamps will go off whenever you turn
page 3-14. the high-beam headlamps on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will come
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the
on again.
instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be on when you don’t need them. Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.

3-15
Instrument Panel Brightness Dome Lamp
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument The dome lamp switch has three positions.
panel lights.

The control for this

feature is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
steering column.

Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down 9(Off): The lamp will not come on as long as the
to dim them. switch is in this position.
AUTO: The lamp will come on when a door is opened.
See Entry Lighting on page 3-17.

R(On): The lamp will stay on as long as the switch

is in this position.

3-16
Entry Lighting Map Lamps
If the dome lamp is in the AUTO position, the dome
lamp and the cargo lamp inside your vehicle will come
on when any door is opened. In addition, the light
will come on when the remote keyless entry unlock
button is pressed. It will stay on for 20 seconds or until
a door is opened. After the door is opened the light
will remain on and stay on for 20 seconds after the
doors are closed, or until you put the key in the ignition
and turn the key to RUN.

Your vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner

above the rearview mirror. Push on the lens in the
lamp to turn them on and off.

Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment,
and is controlled by the dome lamp. See Dome Lamp
on page 3-16.

3-17
Battery Run-Down Protection Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlets and could result
Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
protect your vehicle’s battery. problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will vehicle may damage it or keep other components
avoid draining the battery. If the radio is on, it will turn from working as they should. The repairs would not
off after 10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle is be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
on page 2-17. with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
Accessory Power Outlet(s) the installation instructions included with the equipment.
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
CB radio. any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
The accessory power outlets are located in front of the the plug because the power outlets are designed for
center console storage area, at the rear of the center accessory power plugs only.
console, and in the rear cargo area. The accessory power outlets can use equipment with
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use, a maximum amperage rating up to 14. However,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap. at 14 amperage, there is a potential to drain the battery.
Extended use of the auxiliary power outlets or large
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for current draws may drain the battery and/or shorten
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn battery life.
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.

3-18
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Lift the lid to expose the ashtray. To remove the Climate Control System
ashtray, lift it up.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
Lift the lid to expose the cigarette lighter.
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To use the lighter, push it in all the way and let go.
When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.

Operation
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.

3-19
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or You can also select modes by using the following
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. buttons:
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. To turn off the air completely, @(Recirculate): Press this button on the center knob
turn fan to 0 and select Recirculate. to recirculate cabin air through the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering your
Use the right knob to select from the following modes: vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
There are two minor detents between each mode more quickly. An indicator light below the symbol will
to finely adjust airflow position. come on in this mode. Operation in this mode during
periods of high humidity and cool outside temperatures
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument may result in increased window fogging. If window
panel outlets. fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.

)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half #(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then air-conditioning system on or off. When this button
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. is pressed, an indicator light on the button will come
on to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the Air-conditioning can be selected in any mode as long
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield. as the fan switch is on.
The right knob may also be used to select the defrost The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
and defog modes that are described in this section. the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount
of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

3-20
Defogging and Defrosting Rear Window Defogger
Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of high The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window remove fog from the rear window.
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control The rear window defogger will only work when the
system is used properly. Use the defog mode to clear ignition is in RUN.
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. To avoid fogging windows on rainy and <(Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
humid days at temperatures above freezing, run the air
defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button
conditioning compressor. Also, it is best to avoid the
will come on to let you know that the rear window
use of recirculation mode except when maximum
defogger is activated.
A/C performance is needed or for short times to avoid
exterior odors. Use the defrost mode to remove fog The rear window defogger will only work when the
or frost from the windshield more quickly. When ignition is in RUN. The rear window defogger will stay
you select either of these modes (or the floor mode on for approximately 15 minutes after the button is
which also helps defog the windows slightly), the system pressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC or LOCK.
runs the air-conditioning compressor and cancels If turned on again, the defogger will only run for
recirculation mode to dry the air; however, the approximately five minutes before turning off. The
recirculation light will stay on. For best results, clear all defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button
snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting. again or by turning off the engine.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode. Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air to the damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
windshield and the side window outlets and half to not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach
the floor outlets. a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets.

3-21
Outlet Adjustment To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change
the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

1. Remove the push pins from the rear of the
The passenger compartment outside air is routed passenger’s side air inlet panel. It is located
through a passenger compartment filter. The filter in the rear of the engine compartment on the
removes certain particles from the air, including pollen passenger side of the vehicle.
and dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which may
occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the 2. Open the hood.
filter needs to be replaced early. 3. Remove the push pins from the top and forward
The filter should be replaced as part of routine edge of the passenger’s side air inlet panel.
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance 4. Remove the air inlet panel.
on page 6-4 for when to replace the filter.

3-22
5. Remove the filter from the filter housing by
pressing the release tab at the inboard edge
Warning Lights, Gages,
of the filter housing. and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your
warning lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
6. Remove the filter from the vehicle. with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter. warning lights work together to let you know when there’s
For the type of filter to use see Normal Maintenance a problem with your vehicle.
Replacement Parts on page 6-13. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5. when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.

3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-24
Speedometer and Odometer Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both Your trip odometer is located on the instrument panel
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). and shows how far your vehicle has been driven
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has since the trip odometer was last reset. To reset the trip
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) odometer to zero, press and hold the trip/reset button
on the speedometer for about two seconds.
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to Tachometer
turn it back.
The ERROR message is displayed on the odometer
indicating that the speedometer reading is approximately
10 percent above the actual speed. Press the trip
odometer button to return to the odometer/trip mode.
This message will appear every 10 minutes. If this
occurs, see your dealer for service.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set
to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be.
If not, then it is set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.

The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions

per minute (rpm).

3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
will come on for several seconds to remind people to panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
is already buckled. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the
The safety belt light will airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
also come on and stay diagnostic module.
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for This light will come on
several more. when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime is ready.
nor the light will come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.

3-26
 Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION: The battery warning light
will come on briefly as a
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you check, when you turn
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system on the ignition. Then it
may not be working properly. The airbags should go out when
in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, the engine is started.
or they could even inflate without a crash.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle serviced right away if the If the light does not come on when you start your
airbag readiness light stays on after you vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. This
start your vehicle. condition may indicate your battery warning light is not
functioning properly. If this light comes on while you
are driving, be sure to turn off accessories such as the
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds radio and climate control system. Have your vehicle
when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light does serviced right away.
not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.

3-27
Brake System Warning Light This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can problem.
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, When the ignition is on, the brake light will come on
you need both parts working well. when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. A chime
a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected will also sound if the parking brake is not fully released
right away. and the vehicle is moving. If it stays on after your
parking brake is fully released, it means you have a
brake problem.
The brake light will also come on to indicate a low
brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 5-32 for more
information.

United States Canada

The brake light is located in the instrument panel cluster.

3-28
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the Anti-Lock Brake System
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to Warning Light
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing With the anti-lock brake
Your Vehicle on page 4-36. system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
{CAUTION: for several seconds.
That is normal.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on, there
light on can lead to an accident. If the light may be a problem with the anti-lock portion of the
is still on after you have pulled off the road brake system. If the red BRAKE light is not on, you
still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.
for service.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you
do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock
brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.

3-29
Traction Control System (TCS) If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
Warning Light system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Your vehicle may have a Low Traction Light

traction control system
warning light. The traction
control system warning If your vehicle has
light may come on for the the Traction Control
following reasons: System (TCS) and has
front-wheel-drive, this
light will come on when
the system is limiting
• For vehicles equipped with the traction control wheel spin.
system and front-wheel drive, this light will come on
and stay on if you turn the system off by pressing
If your vehicle has all-wheel-drive, this light will come
the traction control button located on the instrument
on when the all-wheel-drive system is protecting
panel above the audio system. To turn the system
itself from overheating due to extended heavy all wheel
back on, press the button again. The warning
drive usage.
light should go off. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9 for more information. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
• For vehicles equipped with all-wheel-drive, this light normal. The roads may be slippery if this light comes on.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
will come on and stay on when the all-wheel-drive
system is unable to protect for overheating The light will stay on for a few seconds after the system
under extended heavy all-wheel-drive usage. stops limiting wheel spin. This light should also come
on for a few seconds when you start your vehicle.
• If there is an engine-related and brake system If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
problem that is specifically related to traction control,
the traction control system will turn off and the
warning light will come on.

3-30
Engine Coolant Temperature Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Warning Light This gage measures
the temperature of
The engine coolant the vehicle’s engine.
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.

If the indicator needle moves into the shaded area,

the engine is too hot. A temperature indicator light
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the will turn on.
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-23 for more information. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
warning light on could cause your vehicle to vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23.
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
This light will flash when the transaxle has overheated.
See “Transaxle Overheating”, under Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-19, for more information.

3-31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission controls
Check Engine Light may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
Your vehicle is equipped
may not be covered by your warranty.
with a computer which
monitors operation of the Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
fuel, ignition, and emission transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
control systems. vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
This system is called OBD II (On-Board repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner and Modifications on page 5-3.
environment. The check engine light comes on
to indicate that there is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

3-32
This light should come on, as a check to show you If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
is not running. If the light does not come on, have If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
it repaired. This light will also come on during a so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your
malfunction in one of two ways: vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is
may damage the emission control system on your still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required. dealer for service as soon as possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. If the Light Is On Steady
Diagnosis and service may be required. You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If the Light is Flashing Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
The following may prevent more serious damage If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
to your vehicle: install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8.
• Reducing vehicle speed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose
• Avoiding hard accelerations or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
• Avoiding steep uphill grades the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

3-33
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition Programs
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
Have you recently changed brands of fuel? equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will registration.
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. Here are some things you need to know to help your
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling vehicle pass an inspection:
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) engine light is on or not working properly.
This will be detected by the system and cause the Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
light to turn on. (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
If you experience one or more of these conditions, emission control systems have not been completely
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix during normal driving. This may take several days
any mechanical or electrical problems that may of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
have developed. still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.

3-34
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine oil
{CAUTION:
pressure problem, this light
will stay on after you start Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
your engine, or come on If you do, your engine can become so hot that
when you are driving. This it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
indicates that your engine Check your oil as soon as possible and have
is not receiving enough oil. your vehicle serviced.

The engine could be low on oil, or could have some

other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
The oil light could also come on in three other situations: by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
running, the light will come on as a test to show
you it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on
with the ignition on, you may have a problem with
the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If the vehicle is idling at a stop sign, the light may
blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on
for a moment. This is normal.

3-35
Change Engine Oil Light Reduced Engine Power Light
If this light comes on and This light will come
stays on for 30 seconds, on briefly when you
it means that service start the engine.
is required for your
vehicle. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.

After having the oil changed you will need to reset the This light, along with the service engine soon light,
light. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information. will be displayed when a noticeable reduction in
the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle
Security Light and turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and
restart your vehicle. This may correct the condition.
Your vehicle is equipped The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
with a Passlock® the reduced engine power light is on, but acceleration
theft-deterrent system. and speed may be reduced. The performance may
With this system, the be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
security light will flash If this light stays on, see your GM dealer as soon
as you open the door as possible for diagnosis and repair.
if your ignition is off.

This light will come on briefly when the vehicle is

turned on.
For more information, see Passlock® on page 2-15.

3-36
Highbeam On Light Gate Ajar Light
This light will come on If this light comes on,
when the high-beam your liftgate is not
headlamps are in use. completely closed.
Driving with the liftgate
open can cause carbon
monoxide (CO) to enter
the vehicle.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-25 for more information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Fuel Gage

Indicator Light
When the ignition is on,
This light is located on the fuel gage tells you
the instrument panel about how much fuel you
cluster. It comes on have left in your tank.
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.

When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-14 for will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
further information. should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 3-38 for more information.

3-37
Here are four things that some owners ask about. This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low on
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage: fuel. When you add fuel the light should go off. If it does
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off not, have your vehicle serviced.
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the Audio System(s)
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank. Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
or speed up.
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
the ignition is turned on, and will go back to its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
empty when you turn the ignition off. audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
Specifications on page 5-88. when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
Low Fuel Warning Light wheel controls (if equipped).

The light below the fuel

gage will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.

3-38
 Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
{CAUTION: CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
This system provides you with a far greater dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
access to audio stations and song listings. radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
your eyes on the road and your mind on the systems may interfere with the operation of sound
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching equipment that has been added.
while driving.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety
belts, parking brake, and other functions of your
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe vehicle operate through the GM radio/entertainment
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving system. If that equipment is replaced or additional
on page 4-2. equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
distraction while driving. installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
While your vehicle is parked: on page 5-3.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
• Familiarize yourself with its operation. Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can
• Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-17
radio stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the
for more information.
speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you
can tune to your favorite radio stations using the
presets and steering wheel controls (if equipped).

3-39
Setting the Time Radio with CD (Base Level)
To set the hour, press the clock button. The clock
symbol will appear on the audio display and the hour
number will flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase
or to decrease the hour. To set the minutes, press
the clock button again. The minute numbers will flash.
Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or to decrease
the minutes. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
release the clock button to enter the clock set mode,
then press and hold the clock button for three seconds
until UPDATED appears on the display. If the time
is not available from the station, NO TIME UPDATE
will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to Radio Data System (RDS)
an RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
for the time to update.
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations

3-40
This system relies upon receiving specific information Playing the Radio
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station O(Power): Press this button to turn the system
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause on and off.
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station. u(Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station the volume.
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program AUTO e (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume,
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name the audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
of the program being broadcast. road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
XM™ Satellite Radio Service select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW, AUTO
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear on the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available). display. Each higher setting will allow for more volume
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as you
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the display if the radio
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or cannot determine the vehicle speed or if the engine is not
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). running. To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.

8 (Mute): Press and release this button for less than

two seconds to silence the system. MUTE will appear on
the display. Pressing this button again or any pushbutton
on the radio turns the sound back on.

3-41
DISP (Display): For RDS, press the DISP knob to © SCAN ¨: Press and hold either arrow for less
change what appears on the display while using RDS. than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display
The display options are station name, RDS station and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station,
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program play for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
(if available). Press either arrow again to stop scanning. If no
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while station can be found during scan, NOT FOUND will
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories appear on the display and the radio will go back to the
of information related to the current song or channel: last tuned station.
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for
Number/Channel Name. more than two seconds until you hear a beep. The
radio will go to the first preset station stored on
Finding a Station the pushbuttons, play for five seconds, then go on to
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2 the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stop
or AM. The display will show the selection. scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
XM/AUX: Press this button to switch between XM1 or
that are in the selected band.
XM2 (if equipped).
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
o SEEK p: Press the left or right arrow to go to pushbuttons.
the previous or the next station and stay there. The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.

3-42
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASS,
following steps: MID, or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn the
ADJ knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
1. Turn the radio on.
show the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station is weak
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2 or AM. or noisy, decrease the treble.
Press XM/AUX to select XM1 or XM2.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
3. Tune in the desired station. position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then press
4. Press EQ to select the equalization. and hold this button for more than two seconds.
You will hear one beep and the tone control will be
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
adjusted to the middle position.
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, push
that was set will return and the equalization that and hold the tone button when no tone control is
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton. displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. and you will hear one beep. The bass, midrange,
and treble will be adjusted to the middle position.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press and release the
EQ button until TONE Custom appears on the display.
You can also manually adjust the bass, midrange,
and treble using the Bass/Treble button.

3-43
Adjusting the Speakers Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(Balance/Fade) (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
S (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, push 1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
and release the balance and fade button until BAL type select mode. P-TYPE and a program type
appears on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move will appear on the display.
the sound toward the right or the left speakers. 2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
speakers, push and release the balance and fade SEEK right arrow to select the PTY and to take
button until FADE appears on the display. Turn the you to the PTYs first station.
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
rear speakers.
SEEK right arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle desired PTY, NOT FOUND will appear on the
position, select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold this display and the radio will return to the last station
button for more than two seconds. You will hear a you were listening to.
beep and the speaker control will be adjusted to the 5. Press the P-TYPE button or wait 15 seconds,
middle position. to exit program type select mode.
To adjust both speaker controls to the middle If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
position, push and hold the tone button for more than go back to Step 1.
four seconds when no speaker control is displayed.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and you will If PTY is on, the radio will search for stations with
hear a beep. The balance and fade will be adjusted the selected PTY.
to the middle position.

3-44
RDS Messages The last message can be displayed by pressing the
MSG button. You can view the last message until a new
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
When a message is not available from a station,
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
NO MESSAGE AVAIL will appear on the display.
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be Radio Messages
turned off.
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by on the display, it means that the radio has not been
all RDS stations. configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned to the dealer for service.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
see the message. The message may display the artist, THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
song title, call in phone numbers, etc. to the dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll be corrected, contact your dealer.
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.

3-45
 XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Condition Action Required
Message
Not Available The Radio senses that Your vehicle may not be equipped with the XM™ system.
the XM™ system is not Contact your dealership for more information.
present.
XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
encryption code no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
(after 4 second delay) data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
not available The system is working properly.

3-46
 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Condition Action Required
Message
No Info Song/Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with the
servicing facility.
Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
(channel 0) XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
hardware failure)
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

3-47
Playing a CD Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject or DISP knob. Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or the damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it use only CDs in good condition without any
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
When the CD is inserted, the CD icon will appear on the and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
display. As each new track starts to play, TRACK and liquids, and debris.
the track number will appear on the display. Do not play 3 inch (8 cm) CDs without a standard
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced adapter CD.
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the later in this section.
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD on the display.
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-80 for more
information. \(Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD. advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.

3-48
9 RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to hear a track DISP (Display): Press the DISP knob to see how
over again. RPT ON will appear on the display. The long the current track has been playing. The track
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear
to turn off repeat play. RPT OFF will appear on the on the display. To change the default on the display,
display and RPT will disappear from the display. track or elapsed time, press the knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
9 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the The radio will produce one beep and the selected
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. TRACK, display will now be the default. Pressing this knob
TRK#, and the RDM icon will appear on the display. will also display text on commercially recorded
TRACK and the track number will appear on the CDs (if available).
display when each track starts to play. Press RDM EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select the desired
again to turn off random play. RDM OFF will appear equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
on the display and the RDM icon will disappear from will be automatically recalled whenever a CD is played.
the display. For more information, see “EQ” listed previously in
this section.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current track. If this button is pressed more AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
than once, the player will continue moving backward a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
through the CD. inside the radio for future listening.
Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track. 9 CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
If this button is pressed more than once, the player
to the radio. CD will appear on the display.
will continue moving forward through the CD.

© SCAN ¨: To scan the CD, press either SCAN

Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
arrow. Use this feature to listen to ten seconds of
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off
each track of the CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
if this button is pressed first.
to stop scanning.

3-49
CD Messages Radio with CD (MP3)
CHECK DISK: If this message appears on the display,
it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, Radio Data System (RDS)
try a known good CD.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
that broadcast RDS information.
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem. With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations

3-50
This system relies upon receiving specific information Playing the Radio
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station O(Power): Press this button to turn the system
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause on and off.
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station. u(Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station the volume.
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program AUTO e (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume,
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name the audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
of the program being broadcast. road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
XM™ Satellite Radio Service select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW, AUTO
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear on the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available). display. Each higher setting will allow for more volume
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as you
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. drive, automatic volume increases the volume, as
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more AUTO VOL NONE will appear on the display if the radio
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or cannot determine the vehicle speed or if the engine is not
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). running. To turn off automatic volume, press this button
until AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.

8 (Mute): Press and release this button for less than

two seconds to silence the system. MUTE will appear
on the display. Pressing this button again or any
pushbutton on the radio turns the sound back on.

3-51
DISP (Display): For RDS, press the DISP knob Press and hold either arrow for two seconds until
to change what appears on the display while using SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
RDS. The display options are station name, RDS The radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds,
station frequency, PTY, and the name of the program then go on to the next station. Press either arrow again
(if available). to stop scanning. If no station can be found during
scan, NOT FOUND will appear on the display and the
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while radio will go back to the last tuned station.
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories
of information related to the current song or channel: To scan preset stations, press and hold SEEK for
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel more than four seconds until you hear a beep. The
Number/Channel Name. radio will go to the first preset station stored on
the pushbuttons, play for five seconds, then go on
Finding a Station to the next preset station. Press SEEK again to stop
scanning presets.
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2
or AM. The display will show the selection. The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
XM/AUX: Press this button to switch between XM1 or
XM2 (if equipped). 1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations. pushbuttons.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left or right arrow to go to The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
the previous or the next station and stay there. signal that are in the selected band.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal

that are in the selected band.

3-52
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASS,
following steps: MID, or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn the
ADJ knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
1. Turn the radio on.
show the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station is weak
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2 or AM. Press or noisy, decrease the treble.
XM/AUX to select XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
3. Tune in the desired station. position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then press
4. Press EQ to select the equalization. and hold this button for more than two seconds.
You will hear one beep and the tone control will be
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
adjusted to the middle position.
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, push
that was set will return and the equalization that and hold the tone button when no tone control is
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton. displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. and you will hear one beep. The bass, midrange,
and treble will be adjusted to the middle position.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press and release the
EQ button until TONE Custom appears on the display.
You can also manually adjust the bass, midrange,
and treble using the Bass/Treble button.

3-53
Adjusting the Speakers Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(Balance/Fade) (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
S (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, push and 1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
release the balance and fade button until BAL appears type select mode. P-TYPE and a program type
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move the will appear on the display.
sound toward the right or the left speakers. 2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
speakers, push and release the balance and fade SEEK right arrow to take you to the PTYs
button until FADE appears on the display. Turn the first station.
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
4. To go to another station within that PTY press
rear speakers.
the SEEK right arrow again. If the radio cannot
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position, find the desired PTY, NOT FOUND will appear
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold this button on the display and the radio will return to the last
for more than two seconds. You will hear one beep station that was playing.
and the speaker control will be adjusted to the 5. Press the P-TYPE button or wait 15 seconds,
middle position. to exit program type select mode.
To adjust both speaker controls to the middle If PTY times out and is not longer on the display,
position, push and hold the tone button for more than go back to Step 1.
four seconds when no speaker control is displayed.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display and you If PTY is on, the radio will search for stations with
will hear one beep. The balance and the fade will the selected PTY.
be adjusted to the middle position.

3-54
RDS Messages The last message can be displayed by pressing
the MSG button. You can view the last message
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. until a new message is received or a different station
When an alert announcement comes on the current is tuned to.
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
When a message is not available from a station,
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
NO MESSAGE AVAIL will appear on the display
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off. Radio Messages
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
all RDS stations. on the display it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message, be returned to the dealer for service.
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist, LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
song title, call in phone numbers, etc. THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
through the message, press and release the MSG corrected, contact your dealer.
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.

3-55
 XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Condition Action Required
Message
Not Available The Radio senses that Your vehicle may not be equipped with the XM™ system.
the XM™ system is not Contact your dealership for more information.
present.
XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
encryption code no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
(after 4 second delay) data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
not available The system is working properly.

3-56
 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Condition Action Required
Message
No Info Song/Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with the servicing facility.
Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
(channel 0) XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
hardware failure)
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

3-57
Playing a CD Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject or DISP knob. Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
the radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
When a CD is inserted, the CD icon will appear on of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
the display. As each new track starts to play, TRACK Do not play 3 inch (8 cm) CDs without a standard
and the track number will appear on the display. adapter CD.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality later in this section.
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase in s(Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD on the display.
will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled,
see Care of Your CDs on page 3-80 for more information. \(Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
at a reduced volume. Release the button to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.

3-58
9 RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks The radio will produce one beep and the selected
in random, rather than sequential, order. TRACK, TRK #, display will now be the default. Pressing this knob
and the RDM icon will appear on the display. TRACK and will also display text on commercially recorded
the track number will appear on the display when each CDs (if available).
track starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select the desired
play. RDM OFF will appear on the display and the RDM equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
icon will disappear from the display. will be automatically recalled whenever a CD is played.
For more information, see “EQ” listed previously in
© SEEK ¨: Press and release the left arrow to go this section.
to the start of the current track. If this button is pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
backward through the CD. a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Press and release the right arrow to go to the start of
the next track. If this button is pressed more than once, XM/AUX: Press this button to listen to XM™
the player will continue moving forward through the CD. (if equipped) when a CD is playing. The inactive CD
To scan the CD, press and hold either SEEK arrow for will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
more than two seconds. Use this feature to listen to
ten seconds of each track of the CD. Press either SEEK
9 CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
arrow again, to stop scanning. the radio. CD will appear on the display.

DISP (Display): Press the DISP knob to see how Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
long the current track has been playing. The track may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear CDs may be loaded with the ignition or radio off if this
on the display. To change the default on the display, button is pressed first.
track or elapsed time, press the knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.

3-59
Using an MP3 CD The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
MP3 Format order to keep down the complexity and confusion
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer: in trying to locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a Root Directory
CD-R disc.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an directory has compressed audio files, the directory
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually will be displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly
better to burn the disc all at once. under the root directory will be accessed prior to
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and always be accessed before root folders or files.
album will be available for display by the radio Empty Directory or Folder
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
one disc.
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or.m3u, or.rmp advance to the next folder in the file structure that
extension, other file extensions may not work. contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length
of the file, folder or playlist names. You can also play
an MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.

3-60
No Folder When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
will be located under the root folder. When displaying See DISP later in this section for more information.
the name of the folder the radio will display ROOT. The new track name will appear on the display.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located File System and Naming
under the root folder. The folder down and the folder The song name that will be displayed will be the song
up buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
to the root folder. When the radio displays the name name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
of the folder the radio will display ROOT. will display the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Order of Play
Track names longer than 32 characters or 2 pages will
Tracks will be played in the following order: be shortened.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed Playlists
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist You can access preprogrammed playlists which
has been played, play will continue from the first were created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or
track of the first playlist. Real Jukebox™ software, however, you will not
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play have editing capability. These playlists will be treated
will begin from the first track under the root as special folders containing compressed audio
directory. When all tracks from the root directory song files.
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing
the last track from the last folder, play will
begin again at the first track of the first folder
or root directory.

3-61
Playing an MP3 If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
player will pull it in and the CD will begin to play after CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
the player has read the table of contents, has read in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
the file structure, and has determined where the first loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
playable track is located. READING DISC will appear on the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
the display. After the MP3 has been read, the number is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
of folders and tracks will appear on the display. The the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
radio will go back to the default display and the CD icon is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-80 for
will appear. If you want to insert an MP3 with the more information.
ignition off, first press the EJECT button or push the
RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and the If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
ignition on, it will start to play. Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
The track number will appear on the display, as each than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
new track starts to play. to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
use only CDs in good condition without any
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.

3-62
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” \(Forward): Press and hold this button to advance
later in this section. quickly within a track. Press and hold this button for
less than two seconds to advance at 10 times the
9 DIR (Directory): Press and release this button to normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than
display the current directory structure (flat or normal). two seconds to advance at 20 times the normal
Press and release this button twice to change the playing speed. Release the button to play the track.
directory structure. When flat is enabled, the tracks FWD and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the MP3 will be alphabetized by song name. on the display.
The MP3 will play the next alphabetical track when
the current track is finished. 9 RDM (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this button. FLDR
xc w (Previous/Next Folder): Press the down or RDM ON will appear on the display. Once all of the
the up arrow to go to the first track in the previous or tracks in the current folder or playlist have been played
next folder. Pressing this button while in folder random the system will move on to the next folder or playlist
mode will take you to the previous or next folder and and play all of the tracks in random order.
random the tracks in that folder.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold
s(Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse this button for two seconds. You will hear a beep
quickly within a track. Press and hold this button for and DISC RDM ON will appear on the display.
less than two seconds to reverse at 10 times the This feature will not work with playlists.
normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the normal
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
playing speed. Release the button to play the track.
REV and the elapsed time of the track will appear Press and release this button again to turn off random
on the display. play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.

3-63
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start To change the default on the display, press the DISP
of the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the knob until you see the display you want, then hold
start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for more this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
than two seconds will search the previous or next tracks one beep and the selected display will now be
at two tracks per second. Release the button to stop the default.
searching and to play the track. MSG (Message): Press this button to switch within
ADJ (Adjust): Turning this knob will fast track reverse the ID3 tag information such as title, artist name,
or advance through the tracks in all folders or playlists. and album.
The track number and file name will appear on the AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
display for each track. Turning this knob while in random a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in inside the radio for future listening.
sequential order.
XM/AUX: Press this button to listen to XM™
DISP (Display): Press the DISP knob to switch (if equipped) when a CD is playing. The inactive CD
between track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
day mode. The display will show sixteen characters,
but there can be two pages of text. If there are 9 CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
more than eight characters in the song, folder, or to the radio. CD will appear on the display when a
playlist name, pressing this knob within two seconds CD is loaded.
will take you to the next page of text. If there are
no other pages to be shown, pressing this knob within Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
two seconds will take you to the next display mode. may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
• Track mode will display the current track number CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if
and the ID3 tag song name. this button is pressed first.
• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder
or playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

3-64
CD Messages Radio with Six-Disc CD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD. Radio Data System (RDS)
• The label may be caught in the CD player. The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, that broadcast RDS information.
try a known good CD.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
an error message, write it down and provide it to your of programming
dealer when reporting the problem. • Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations

3-65
This system relies upon receiving specific information Playing the Radio
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station O(Power): Press this button to turn the system
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause on and off.
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station. u(Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station the volume.
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program AUTO e (Automatic Volume): With automatic
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to
of the program being broadcast. make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if available). on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels including more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is speed. The volume level should always sound the same
required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more to you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). speed or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.

3-66
8 (Mute): Press and release this button for less than o SEEK p: Press the left or right arrow to go to
two seconds to silence the system. MUTE will appear the previous or the next station and stay there.
on the display. Pressing this button again or any
pushbutton on the radio turns the sound back on. The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
DISP (Display): For RDS, press the DISP knob to
change what appears on the display while using RDS. SCAN: Press and hold this button for less than
The display options are station name, RDS station two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and
frequency, PTY, and the name of the program you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play
(if available). for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning. If no station
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while can be found during scan, NOT FOUND will appear
in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories on the display and the radio will go back to the
of information related to the current song or channel: last tuned station.
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name. To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. the
Finding a Station radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for five seconds, then go on to
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2 the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stop
or AM. The display will show the selection. scanning presets.

XM/AUX: Press this button to switch between XM1 or The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
XM2 (if equipped). that are in the selected band.

ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

3-67
Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the P/Q (Bass/Treble): Press this button until BASS,
following steps: MID, or TREBLE appears on the display. Turn the
ADJ knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
1. Turn the radio on.
show the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station is weak
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2 or AM. or noisy, decrease the treble.
Press XM/AUX to select XM1 or XM2.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
3. Tune in the desired station. position, select BASS, MID, or TREBLE. Then press
4. Press EQ to select the equalization. and hold this button for more than two seconds. You will
hear one beep and the tone control will be adjusted to
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
the middle position.
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station To adjust all tone controls to the middle position, push
that was set will return and the equalization that and hold the tone button when no tone control is
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton. displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on the display,
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. you will hear one beep and the tone controls will be
adjusted to the middle position.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings designed for country, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press and release the
EQ button until TONE Custom appears on the display.
Then manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble
using the Bass/Treble button.

3-68
Adjusting the Speakers Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(Balance/Fade) (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
S (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press and 1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
release the balance and fade button until BAL appears type select mode. P-TYPE and a program type
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to move the will appear on the display.
sound toward the right or the left speakers. 2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
speakers, press and release the balance and fade SEEK right arrow to select and to take you to
button until FADE appears on the display. Turn the the PTYs first station.
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
rear speakers.
SEEK right arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position, desired PTY, NOT FOUND will appear on the
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold this button display and the radio will return to the last station
for more than two seconds. You will hear one beep that was playing.
and the speaker control will be adjusted to the 5. Press the P-TYPE button or wait 15 seconds,
middle position. to exit program type select mode.
To adjust both speaker controls to the middle position, If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
push and hold the tone button when no speaker go back to Step 1.
control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear on
the display, you will hear one beep and the speaker If PTY is on, the radio will search for stations with the
controls will be adjusted to the middle position. selected PTY.

3-69
RDS Messages The last message can be displayed by pressing the
MSG button. You can view the last message until a new
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies. message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
When a message is not available from a station,
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
NO MESSAGE AVAIL will appear on the display.
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be Radio Messages
turned off.
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency for your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by on the display it means that the radio has not been
all RDS stations. configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to the dealer for service.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
see the message. The message may display the artist, THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
song title, call in phone numbers, etc. to the dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll corrected, contact your dealer.
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.

3-70
 XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Condition Action Required
Message
Not Available The Radio senses that Your vehicle may not be equipped with the XM™ system.
the XM™ system is not Contact your dealership for more information.
present.
XL (Explicit Language XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels) after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
encryption code no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after 4 second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl Channel no longer This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
available Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info Artist Name/Feature No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
not available The system is working properly.

3-71
 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Condition Action Required
Message
No Info Song/Program Title No song title information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info Category Name No category information is available at this time on this
not available channel. The system is working properly.
No Info No Text/Informational No text or informational messages are available at this time
message available on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category The system is working properly.
XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer.
Radio ID Radio ID label If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
(channel 0) XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
hardware failure)
Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

3-72
Playing a CD Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
When a CD is inserted, the CD icon will appear on to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
number will appear on the display. use only CDs in good condition without any
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. liquids, and debris.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality later in this section.
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase 9 LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in CD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check To insert one CD, do the following:
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, 1. Turn the ignition on.
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD 2. Press and release the LOAD button.
is soiled, see Care of Your CDs on page 3-80 for
3. Wait for INSERT CD to flash on the display.
more information.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

3-73
To insert multiple CDs, do the following: If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
1. Turn the ignition on. each CD will be displayed and the currently selected slot
number will be underlined.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and MULTI LOAD CD, Z (Eject): To eject a single CD press this button.
then INSERT CD and the number will appear on EJECTING CD # will appear on the display and
the display. the single CD icon will flash. When the CD is ready
to be removed the CD will eject part way from the
3. Once INSERT CD and the number appears on the
radio and REMOVE CD # will flash with the single
display, load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the
CD icon flashing until the CD is removed. If the CD
slot, label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
is not removed within 25 seconds the radio will pull it
Once the CD is loaded, INSERT CD and the number back in.
will appear on the display again. Once INSERT CD
and the number appear on the display again, you can To eject multiple CDs, press and hold the eject button.
load another CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. EJECTING ALL CDS will appear on the display, the
Do not try to load more than six. single CD icon will flash, and you will hear a beep.
When the CD is ready to be removed the CD will
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete eject part way from the radio and REMOVE CD # will
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, with flash with the single CD icon flashing until the CD
the radio on or off, press the LOAD button to cancel the is removed. If the CD is not removed within 25 seconds
loading function. The radio will begin to play the last the radio will pull it back in. After the CD is removed
CD loaded. the radio will repeat the previous actions until all of
the CDs have been removed or a CD is pulled back in.

3-74
Playing a Specific Loaded CD RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire
CD can be repeated.
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, press the numbered To use repeat, do the following:
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to play. • To repeat the track you are listening to, press
A small bar will appear under the CD number that is and release the RPT button. RPT ON TRK #
playing, and the track number will appear. will appear on the display. Press RPT again to
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” turn it off. RPT OFF will appear on the display.
later in this section. • To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for more than two seconds.
s(Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse RPT CD # will appear on the display. Press
quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced RPT again to turn it off. RPT OFF will appear
volume. T#, the elapsed time of the track, and REV on the display.
will appear on the display. Release this button to play
the passage.

\(Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to

advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. T#, the elapsed time of the track,
and FWD will appear on the display. Release this button
to play the passage.

3-75
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on SCAN button for more than two seconds. The CD will
one CD or on all of the CDs. go to the next CD, play the first 10 seconds of each
track, then go on to the next CD. Press the SCAN button
To use random, do one of the following: again to stop scanning.
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press the RDM button. RDM ONE DISP (Display): Press the DISP button to switch
will appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn between time and the elapsed time of the track.
it off. RDM OFF will appear on the display. To change the default on the display (CD#/Track#/Time,
CD#/Track#, or Track#/Elapsed Time), press the
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded button until you see the display you want, then hold
in random order, press and hold the RDM button the button for two seconds. The radio will produce one
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and the selected display will now be the default.
beep and RANDOM ALL CDS and RDM will appear
on the display. Press RDM again to turn it off. EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select the desired
RANDOM OFF will appear on the display. equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
will be automatically set whenever a CD is played.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of For more information on equalization, see “EQ” listed
the current track if more than eight seconds have played. previously in this section.
Press the right arrow to go to the beginning of the next
AM/FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than once,
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
the player will continue moving backward or forward
inside the radio for future listening.
through the CD.
XM/AUX: Press this button to listen to XM™
SCAN: Press and release this button to scan the
(if equipped) when a CD is playing. The inactive CD
current CD. The CD will go to the next track, play the
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
first 10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press
the SCAN button again to stop scanning. 9 CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio.

3-76
Using Song List Mode SONG LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try
to save more than 20 selections.
R (Song List): The six-disc CD changer has a To play the song list, press and release the song list
feature called song list. This feature is capable of button. One beep will be heard and SONG LIST
saving 20 track selections. will appear on the display. The recorded tracks will
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the begin to play in the order that they were saved.
following steps: Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
1. Turn the radio on and load it with at least one CD. Seeking past the last saved track will return to the
See “LOAD” listed previously in this section for first saved track.
more information. To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song following steps:
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. 1. Turn the CD player on.
If S-LIST appears on the display, press the song
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
list button to turn it off.
SONG LIST will appear on the display.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desired track
pushbutton and then use the SEEK left arrow to
to be deleted.
locate the track to be saved. The track will begin
to play. 4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.
When pressing song list, one beep will be heard
4. Press and hold the song list button for two or more
immediately. After two seconds of continuously
seconds to save the track into memory. When song
pressing the song list button, two beeps will
list is pressed, a beep will be heard immediately.
be heard to confirm that the track has been deleted
After two seconds of continuously pressing song list,
and TRACK number DELETED will appear on
two beeps will sound to confirm that the track has
the display.
been saved and TRACK number ADDED will
appear on the display. After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections. song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.

3-77
To delete the entire song list, perform the CD Messages
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on. CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on. following reasons:
SONG LIST will appear on the display.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
3. Press and hold the song list button for more than normal, the CD should play.
four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed by
two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep will • You are driving on a very rough road. When the
be heard after four seconds. SONG LIST EMPTY road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
will appear on the display indicating the song • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
list has been deleted.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved and try again.
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the • There may have been a problem while burning
song list again are added to the bottom of the list. the CD.
To end song list mode, press the song list button. • The label may be caught in the CD player.
One beep will be heard and SONG LIST will be If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
removed from the display. try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.

3-78
Theft-Deterrent Feature To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear
to go to the next or previous track.
on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not To scan the current CD, press and hold either up or
operate if stolen. down arrow for more than two seconds. The CD will go
to the next track, play the first 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either up or down arrow
Audio Steering Wheel Controls again to stop scanning.
If your vehicle has this To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and hold either
feature, some audio up or down arrow for more than four seconds. The
controls can be adjusted CD will go to the next CD, play the first 10 seconds of
at the steering wheel. each track, then go on to the next CD. Press either
They include the following: up or down arrow again to stop scanning.
+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to the When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
next or to the previous radio station and stay there. press this button to go to the next available CD,
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal if multiple CDs are loaded.
that are in the selected band.

3-79
Radio Reception XM™ Satellite Radio Service
You may experience frequency interference and XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
static during normal radio reception if items such as reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as
and external electronic devices are plugged into with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the
AM XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Care of Your CDs
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
will boost the power levels during the day, and then Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
reduce these levels during the night. Static can cases or other protective cases and away from direct
also occur when things like storms and power lines sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
interfere with radio reception. When this happens, surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
try reducing the treble on your radio. such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
FM Stereo soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean,
soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals with water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). starts from the center to the edge.
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling
it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.

3-80
Care of the CD Player If the rear roof rack rail is too close to the XM™
antenna or if objects stored on the roof rack cover or
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not block the XM™ antenna, the performance of the XM™
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal system may be affected.
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Chime Level Adjustment
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime level adjustment is only available on RDS radios.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
washes without being damaged. If the mast should To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
If the mast is badly bent, replace it. off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
To change back to the default or normal setting,
tightened to the front quarter panel.
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
System example of the new volume selected. Removing the
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and module will disable vehicle chimes.
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.

3-81
✍ NOTES

3-82
 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 City Driving ..................................................4-20
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Braking .........................................................4-6 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7 Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9 Ice or Snow ..............................................4-30
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .......................4-10 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-31
Steering ......................................................4-11 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-31
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13 Towing ..........................................................4-36
Passing .......................................................4-14 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-36
Loss of Control .............................................4-15 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-36
Driving at Night ............................................4-16 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17

4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle {CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
Defensive Driving anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive expressways, it means “Always expect the
defensively. unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or
Please start with a very important safety device in your other drivers are going to be careless and
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do
Everyone on page 1-12. and be ready. Rear-end collisions are about
the most preventable of accidents. Yet they
are common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything
that distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult and
can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.

4-2
Drunken Driving Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol, so
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims There are good medical, psychological, and
every year. developmental reasons for these laws.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
a vehicle: safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
• Judgment
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
• Muscular Coordination many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
• Vision
the problem.
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
Police records show that almost half of all motor who is drinking depends upon four things:
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, • The amount of alcohol consumed
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than • The drinker’s body weight
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been • The amount of food that is consumed before
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
and during drinking
300,000 people injured.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol

4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) A person who consumes food just before or during
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses have a lower relative percentage of body water
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka. means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,

4-4
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of {CAUTION:
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
and judgment can be affected by even a
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol small amount of alcohol. You can have a
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold serious — or even fatal — collision if you
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not drive after drinking. Please do not drink and
the right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need drive or ride with a driver who has been
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

There is something else about drinking and driving that

many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash Control of a Vehicle
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or the places where the tires meet the road.
permanently disabled is higher than if the person Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
had not been drinking. easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-9.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-5
Braking Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28. braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
Braking action involves perception time and
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
reaction time.
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
foot and do it. That is reaction time. That means better braking and longer brake life.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
second. But that is only an average. It might be less normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels the brake pedal will be harder to push.
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
emergency, so keeping enough space between
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
your vehicle and others is important.
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.

4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has anti-lock

brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel
will come on briefly
when you start your
vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to

drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise
while this test is going on, and you may even notice
that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
This is normal. safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.

4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
faster than any driver could. The computer is need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
programmed to make the most of available tire and decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
road conditions. This can help you steer around the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
the obstacle while braking hard. your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock brakes, you can steer and
brake at the same time. However, if you do not have
anti-lock brakes, your first reaction — to hit the
brake pedal hard and hold it down — may be the wrong
thing to do. Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates do, the vehicle cannot respond to your steering.
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.

4-8
Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it was Traction Control System (TCS)
headed when the wheels stopped rolling. That could
be off the road, into the very thing you were trying Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
to avoid, or into traffic. limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
If you do not have anti-lock brakes, use a “squeeze” road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
braking technique. This will give you maximum braking that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
while maintaining steering control. You can do this beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
pressure.
This light will come on
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze when your traction control
the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear system is limiting wheel
or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. spin. You may feel or hear
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have the system working, but
anti-lock brakes, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake this is normal.
System (ABS) on page 4-7.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking. The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud, ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
on page 4-31.

4-9
 The traction control system All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
can be turned off by
pressing the traction If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
control button, located system operates automatically without any action
on the instrument panel required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin
above the audio system. to slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to
drive the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
The traction control system can be activated again by This light will come on
pressing the traction control button. when engine torque is
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press reduced to protect
the button, the traction control off light will appear on the the AWD system from
instrument panel cluster. The system will not turn off overheating. You may
until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel feel or hear a change
spin. You can turn the system back on at any time by in engine output, but
pressing the button again. If the light does not come this is normal.
on, you may not have traction control and your vehicle
should be serviced by a dealer. During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque
may be reduced to protect AWD system components.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s If the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD
performance. See Accessories and Modifications usage, the AWD system will shut itself off to protect
on page 5-3 for more information. the system from overheating. When the system
cools down, the AWD system will activate itself again
automatically; this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes
depending on outside temperature and vehicle use.

4-10
If the AWD system is unable to protect the system from Steering Tips
overheating, the traction off light will come on to indicate
no protection capability. If this light comes on, take your It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
vehicle in for service. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Steering Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
Electric Power Steering The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power steering
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
assist because the electric power steering system is not
you will understand this.
functioning, you can steer, but it will take more effort.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
should return shortly after a few normal steering Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
movements. systems — steering and braking — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Unless you
The electric power steering system does not require
have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
braking can demand too much of those places.
problems, such as abnormally high steering effort for
You can lose control.
a prolonged period of time, contact your dealer for
service repairs.

4-11
The same thing can happen if you are steering through Steering in Emergencies
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can There are times when steering can be more effective
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
System (TCS) on page 4-9. pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on You can avoid these problems by braking — if you
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is
way you want it to go, and slow down. not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should around the problem.
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under like these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your much speed as you can from a possible collision.
front wheels are straight ahead. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through depending on the space available.
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.

4-12
 Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
once you have avoided the object.
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
The fact that such emergency situations are always the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
at all times and wear safety belts properly. pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.

4-13
Passing • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a one thing, following too closely reduces your area
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, of vision, especially if you are following a larger
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane back a reasonable distance.
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in not get too close. Time your move so you will be
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger increasing speed as the time comes to move into
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
the worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. have a running start that more than makes up for the
So here are some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and to crossroads for situations that might affect and wait for another opportunity.
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait for a better time. wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might and check the blind spot.
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all • Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear. start your left lane change signal before moving out
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in
of approaching traffic. your inside mirror, activate your right lane change
signal and move back into the right lane.

4-14
 Remember that your passenger side outside mirror Skidding
is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is. In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the those conditions. But skids are always possible.
next vehicle.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
it may be slowing down or starting to turn. speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
can ease a little to the right. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Loss of Control If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
Let us review what driving experts say about what See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. If you
happens when the three control systems — brakes, do not have this system, or if the system is off, then
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the your foot off the accelerator pedal.
driver has asked.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
of less danger. your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.

4-15
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, Driving at Night
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
and vehicle control more limited.
Here are some tips on night driving.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
• Drive defensively.
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a • Do not drink and drive.
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning glare from headlamps behind you.
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow • Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down and keep more space between you
slow down when you have any doubt. and other vehicles.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
do not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the much road ahead.
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as and rest.
the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-16
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they
also make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
are not even aware of it.

4-17
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy going through some car washes can cause problems,
rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
and even people walking. you hit them.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled Hydroplaning
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
up under your tires that they can actually ride on
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
to separate from the inserts.
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

{CAUTION: Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if

your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure
in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not is standing on the road. If you can see reflections
work as well in a quick stop and may cause from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
pulling to one side. You could lose control raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could
of the vehicle. be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of water Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
until your brakes work normally. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

4-18
Driving Through Deep Standing Water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep • Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
puddles or standing water, water can come in your parking lamps — to help make you more
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage visible to others.
your engine. Never drive through water that is • Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. distance. And be especially careful when you
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water, pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
drive through them very slowly. room ahead, and be prepared to have your
Driving Through Flowing Water view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-46.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowing water can carry away
a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.

4-19
City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the

amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out
for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.

4-20
Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at
close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.

4-21
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over Before Leaving on a Long Trip
your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle
in your blind spot. Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain must start when you are not fresh — such as after
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles
to move slightly slower at night. that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
Drive on to the next exit. service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
The exit speed is usually posted. ready and willing to help if you need it.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you
are going slower than you actually are.

4-22
Here are some things you can check before a trip: Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside? Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked There is something about an easy stretch of road with
all levels? the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for can leave the road in less than a second, and you
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to could crash and be injured.
the recommended pressure? What can you do about highway hypnosis?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook First, be aware that it can happen.
along your route? Should you delay your trip a Then here are some tips:
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.

4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from

driving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-24
 • Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
{CAUTION: or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the • As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
to do all the work of slowing down. They could or an accident.
get so hot that they would not work well. You
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
would then have poor braking or even none
warn of special problems. Examples are long
going down a hill. You could crash. Always grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
have your engine running and your vehicle in area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
gear when you go downhill. appropriate action.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.

4-25
Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple
of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-46.

4-26
 If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on
a slippery road. But you can turn the TCS off if you
ever need to. You should turn the TCS off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow on page 4-30. Even though your vehicle has TCS,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you
may want to turn the TCS off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
If you do not have TCS, accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast,
the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under
the tires even more.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is page 4-7. ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when
about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and you have ABS or not, you will want to begin stopping
sand crews can get there. sooner than you would on dry pavement. Without ABS,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
or loose snow — drive with caution. get the most traction you can.

4-27
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. yourself and your passengers safe:
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you • Turn on your hazard flashers.
can still steer.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater you have been stopped by the snow.
following distance on any slippery road. • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are
near help and you can hike through the snow.

4-28
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
{CAUTION: slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon heater run for a while.
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in engine again and repeat this only when you feel really
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
the base of your vehicle, especially any that possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
around again from time to time to be sure and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
snow does not collect there. or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.

4-29
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow {CAUTION:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as can explode, and you or others could be
rocking can help you get out when you are stuck, injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of
but you must use caution. the vehicle can overheat. That could cause
an engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts

of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin
the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle
back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-31.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-61.

4-30
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your can carry. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
vehicle has traction control, you should turn your traction weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
control system off. See Traction Control System Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
(TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
{CAUTION:
pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries, either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
you may need to be towed out. If you do need to Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-36. your vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.

4-31
Tire and Loading Information Label The tire and loading information label lists the number
of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The vehicle capacity weight includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options.
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation, see Tires on page 5-46
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Label Example Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). of occupants and cargo should never exceed
With the driver’s door open, you will find the XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
label attached below the door lock post (striker). 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

4-32
 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Example 1
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
Item Description Total
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how Maximum Vehicle
this reduces the available cargo and luggage A Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 1 =
load capacity for your vehicle.
Subtract
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer B Occupant Weight 300 lbs (136 kg)
on page 4-38 for important information on towing 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips. Available Occupant
C 700 lbs (317 kg)
and Cargo Weight =

4-33
 Example 2 Example 3

Item Description Total Item Description Total

Maximum Vehicle Maximum Vehicle
A Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 2 = for Example 3 =
Subtract Subtract
B Occupant Weight 750 lbs (340 kg) B Occupant Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
C Available 250 lbs (113 kg) C Available 0 lbs (0 kg)
Cargo Weight = Cargo Weight =

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label

for specific information about your vehicle’s maximum
vehicle capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo
should never exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle
capacity weight.

4-34
Certification Label The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
rear edge of the driver’s door.
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
The label shows the size of your original tires and the your vehicle handles. These could cause you
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

4-35
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as
Towing
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
{CAUTION: you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. Recreational Vehicle Towing
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
inside the vehicle so that some of them behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
are above the tops of the seats. The two most common types of recreational vehicle
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
in your vehicle. vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and
• When you carry something inside the “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels
vehicle, secure it whenever you can. on the ground and two wheels up on a device known
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless as a “dolly”).
you need to. With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

4-36
Here are some important things to consider before If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
you do recreational vehicle towing: towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? be towed with the car carrier equipment.
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s Dolly Towing
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow
your vehicle, do the following:
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
additional advice and equipment recommendations. 2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would 3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed.
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-22.
5. Release the parking brake.
Dinghy Towing
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels will be on the ground.
if any of its wheels will be on the ground. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can
its wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive be towed with car carrier equipment.
vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on
the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following.

4-37
Towing a Trailer To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering
{CAUTION: means changes in handling, acceleration, braking,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering
If you do not use the correct equipment and takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too That is the reason for this section. In it are many
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
even at all. You and your passengers could Many of these are important for your safety and that of
be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would your rig will be legal, not only where you live
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow but also where you will be driving. A good source
the instructions in this section and check with your for this information can be state or provincial police.
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle. • Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.

4-38
 • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
axle or other parts could be damaged. temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a any special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
not make starts at full throttle. This helps your See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at for more information.
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
Three important considerations have to do with weight: driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
• Weight of the trailer trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
• Weight of the trailer tongue must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at our Customer Assistance
Weight of the Trailer Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4
How heavy can a trailer safely be? for more information.
If you have the trailer towing package, your vehicle In Canada, write to:
can tow up to 2,900 lbs. (1 300 kg) with up to General Motors of Canada Limited
five occupants or up to 3,500 lbs. (1 575 kg) with up Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
to two occupants. But even that can be too heavy. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-39
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, passengers,
or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight
your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the
trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow
a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW
because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. If you are using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31 for more hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

4-40
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper You should always attach chains between your
limit for cold tires. You will find these numbers on vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under
the Certification/Tire Label at the rear edge of the the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
driver’s door, or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31. from contacting the road if it becomes separated
Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may
your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the
trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
Hitches recommendation for attaching safety chains and do
not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow: Trailer Brakes
• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
will weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), be sure
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
to use a properly mounted, weight-carrying
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install, adjust
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
and maintain them properly.
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes,
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system.
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, both brake systems will not work well,
If you do, remember to seal the holes when you or at all.
remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-25. Dirt and water can, too.

4-41
Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
{CAUTION: And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
If you have a rear-most window open and responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
unconsciousness or death. See Engine brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
Exhaust on page 2-25. To maximize your apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
safety when towing a trailer: the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
starting on your trip. the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
• Keep the rear-most windows closed. brakes are still working.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle Following Distance
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
heating or cooling system on and with the you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, This can help you avoid situations that require
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use heavy braking and sudden turns.
the climate control setting for maximum
air because it only recirculates the air
inside your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.

4-42
Passing Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You will need more passing distance up ahead when When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a extra wiring.
good deal longer, you will need to go much farther The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
your lane.
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
Backing Up you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
have someone guide you. bulbs are still working.
Making Turns Driving On Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
could cause the trailer to come in contact with start down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. shift down, you might have to use your brakes so
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike 1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in L4 instead of AUTOMATIC
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. OVERDRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lower gear.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in This will minimize heat build-up and extend the life
advance. of your transaxle.

4-43
Parking on Hills When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
{CAUTION: while you do the following:
• Start your engine.
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes • Shift into a gear.
wrong, your rig could start to move. People • Release the parking brake.
can be injured, and both your vehicle and
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
the trailer can be damaged.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
the chocks.
do the following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift Maintenance When Trailer Towing
into PARK (P) yet.
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
wheels. on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release operation are automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts,
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
the load. covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good idea to
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your review these sections before you start your trip.
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
5. Release the regular brakes. are tight.

4-44
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-31
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 Brakes ........................................................5-32
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 Battery ........................................................5-34
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Jump Starting ...............................................5-34
Adding Equipment to the Outside All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-40
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-5
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-42
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-42
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-42
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Additives .......................................................5-6
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-43
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-44
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-45
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Tires ..............................................................5-46
Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-47
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-50
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-52
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-54
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18 When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-55
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-21 Buying New Tires .........................................5-56
Engine Coolant .............................................5-21 Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-57
Engine Overheating .......................................5-23 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-58
Overheated Engine Protection Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-59
Operating Mode ........................................5-25 Wheel Replacement ......................................5-60
Cooling System ............................................5-26 Tire Chains ..................................................5-61

5-1
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-62 Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-79
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-62 Tires ...........................................................5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-64 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-80
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Finish Damage .............................................5-80
Spare Tire ................................................5-65 Underbody Maintenance ................................5-80
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-72 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-80
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-73 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-81
Appearance Care ............................................5-74 Vehicle Identification ......................................5-82
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-74 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-82
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-75 Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-82
Leather .......................................................5-76 Electrical System ............................................5-83
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-83
Surfaces ..................................................5-76 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-83
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-77 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-83
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-77 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-83
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-77 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-84
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-78 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-85
Finish Care ..................................................5-78
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-78 Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-88

5-2
Service Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer they can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
and GM-trained and supported service people. handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. control and stability control. Some of these accessories
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and
ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.

5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive {CAUTION:
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and You can be injured and your vehicle could be
some component wear by-products contain and/or damaged if you try to do service work on a
emit these chemicals.
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,

you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle
than this manual can. To order the proper service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.

5-4
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting Gasoline Octane
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-61. Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
list the mileage and the date of any service work you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14. drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
Adding Equipment to the Outside 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle Gasoline Specifications
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to specification D 4814 in the United States or
the outside of your vehicle. CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Fuel General Motors recommends against the use of
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. page 5-6 for additional information.

5-5
California Fuel Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that are now required to contain additives that will help
meet California specifications. See the underhood prevent engine and fuel system deposits from
emission control label. If this fuel is not available forming, allowing your emission control system to
in states adopting California emissions standards, work properly. In most cases, you should not have to
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines
federal specifications, but emission control system contain only the minimum amount of additive required
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake
smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems
page 3-32. If this occurs, return to your authorized due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, Also, your GM dealer has additives that will help
repairs may not be covered by your warranty. correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol
must not be used in vehicles that were not designed
for those fuels.

5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel Fuels in Foreign Countries
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel If you plan on driving in another country outside the
system and also damage the plastic and rubber United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
parts. That damage would not be covered under to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
your warranty. not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive be covered by your warranty.
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline contact a major oil company that does business in
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors the country where you will be driving.
recommends against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.

5-7
Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries
to you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
is against the law in some places. Keep door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
children away from the fuel pump; never let
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
children pump fuel. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.

5-8
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished to light and may damage your fuel tank and
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Lamp on page 3-32.
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-77.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-32.

5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
{CAUTION:
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. An electric fan under the hood can start up
You can be badly burned and your vehicle and injure you even when the engine is not
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
to you and others: from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, {CAUTION:
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
inside of the fill opening before operating and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
until the filling is complete. and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline. others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located inside
the vehicle, to the
left of the steering
column.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and move

the secondary hood release lever to the right.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood you will see the following:

5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Engine Oil
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” Checking Engine Oil
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
under Engine Oil on page 5-13.
oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level
D. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-32. ground.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-83. Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 5-34. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
on page 5-21. the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
Washer Fluid on page 5-31. or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13
When to Add Engine Oil See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the

dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of SAE 5W-30 may not
oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains appear on all caps.
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-88. Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
has so much oil that the oil level gets above Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper through.
operating range, the engine could be damaged.

5-14
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting these

requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,

and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
• GM6094M GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
best for your vehicle. for your vehicle.

5-15
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the Engine Oil Life System
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 When to Change Engine Oil
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
engine at extremely low temperatures. when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
Engine Oil Additives on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard GM6094M you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection. When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A change engine oil light will come on. Change your oil
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a
year and at this time the system must be reset. Your
dealer has GM-trained people who will perform this
work using genuine GM parts and reset the system.
It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.

5-16
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life What to Do with Used Oil
System Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
light being turned on, reset the system. warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
three times within five seconds. it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
The change engine oil light will flash while the or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle
system is resetting. it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you
have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
If the change engine oil light comes back on and center for help.
stays on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine 1. Turn off the engine.
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter
2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.

5-18
3. Disconnect the crank case ventilation tube. 5. Remove the air outlet duct.
4. Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not pry the clamps off.

5-19
 8. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.
9. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws
on the clamps that hold the duct in place.
10. Reconnect the crank case ventilation tube.
11. Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector.

{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine backfires.
6. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. To remove If it is not there and the engine backfires,
the cover, pull up on the front and then pull the you could be burned. Do not drive with it off,
cover out. and be careful working on the engine with
7. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. the air cleaner/filter off.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cracks, cuts, and deterioration. The air outlet
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
duct must be replaced if damaged.
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

5-20
Automatic Transaxle Fluid The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. on page 5-23.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
service department and have it repaired as soon DEX-COOL® coolant will:
as possible.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure to use • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended Fluids • Protect against rust and corrosion.
and Lubricants on page 6-11.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages • Let the warning lights and gages work as
may not be covered by your warranty. Always use they should.
the automatic transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
Engine Coolant require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 100,000 miles DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
(166 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

5-21
What to Use If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
do not need to add anything else. your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Checking Coolant
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your

engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. The surge tank is located on the driver’s side of the
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-22
 Adding Coolant
{CAUTION: If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the a

engine and radiator are hot can allow steam

and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
{CAUTION:
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot. You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
COLD FILL line. When your engine is warm, the level
should be at the COLD FILL line or a little higher. When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.

Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-31.

5-23
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
{CAUTION: Protection Operating Mode on page 5-25 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
Steam from an overheated engine can burn emergency.
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear If No Steam Is Coming From
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get Your Engine
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam An overheat warning can indicate a serious problem.
or coolant before you open the hood. If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
If you keep driving when your engine is
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. when you:
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get • Climb a long hill on a hot day.
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. • Stop after high-speed driving.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating • Idle for long periods in traffic.
Mode on page 5-25 for information on driving • Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.

5-24
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, Overheated Engine Protection
try this for a minute or so:
1. If the air conditioner is on, turn it off.
Operating Mode
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
speed and open the windows as necessary. be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a traffic protection mode which alternates firing groups of
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
the highest gear while driving. you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can performance. The temperature gage will indicate
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes. an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
normally. mode should be avoided.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the allow the engine to cool before attempting any
engine for three minutes while you are parked. repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating on page 5-13.
Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

5-25
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what {CAUTION:
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,

do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.

A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

B. Coolant Surge Tank

5-26
 Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
{CAUTION: See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 5-25 for information on driving to a safe
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine place in an emergency.
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
If you do, you can be burned. cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
could cause an engine fire, and you could be would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check

to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.

5-27
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank {CAUTION:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
cause your engine to overheat and be severely system can blow out and burn you badly. They
damaged. are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible can come out at high speed. Never turn the
but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL line, add a cap when the cooling system, including the
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. the pressure cap.

5-28
 {CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the 1. You can remove the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot coolant surge tank
but you would not get the overheat warning. pressure cap when
Your engine could catch fire and you or others the cooling system,
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, including the coolant
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss,
wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure
still left to be vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.

5-29
 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the start the engine and let it run until you can feel
COLD FILL line. the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out
for the engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.

5-30
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling Notice:
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
pressure cap. If the coolant is not at the proper level
water.
when the system cools down again, see your dealer.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
Windshield Washer Fluid damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
What to Use clean as well as washer fluid.
When you need windshield or rear window washer • Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
fluid be sure to read the instructions before use. If you full when it is very cold. This allows for
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the expansion if freezing occurs, which could
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that damage the tank if it is completely full.
has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.

5-31
Brakes You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
Brake Fluid system.
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid. {CAUTION:
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
for the location of the the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
reservoir. hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal Light on page 3-28.
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should Brake Wear
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving,
too much fluid when you get new brake linings. except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

5-32
 Brake Pedal Travel
{CAUTION: See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead Brake Adjustment
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake Replacing Brake System Parts
pads could result in costly brake repair.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help When you replace parts of your braking system — for
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect example, when your brake linings wear down and you
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications. GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear between your front and rear brakes can change — for
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake the worse. The braking performance you have come to
drums should be removed and inspected each time the expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you in the wrong replacement brake parts.
have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes
inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.

5-33
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When {CAUTION:
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s Batteries have acid that can burn you and
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
battery. if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
For battery replacement, see your dealer or the page 5-34 for tips on working around a battery
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see without getting hurt.
Service and Owner Publications in Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related You must close all doors and the liftgate before
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause you must press the unlock button on the key transmitter.
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after Failure to follow this procedure may result in a
handling. sounding alarm. Pressing unlock on the key transmitter
would stop the sounding alarm.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days Jump Starting
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from If your battery has run down, you may want to use
running down. another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

5-34
 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
{CAUTION: each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
because: could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
• They contain gas that can explode or in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
ignite. transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
• They contain enough electricity to NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
burn you.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some on during the jump starting procedure, they could
or all of these things can hurt you. be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
by your warranty. unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle. the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt And it could save your radio!
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

5-35
 4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and The remote negative (−)
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle. terminal is located in
You will not need to access your battery for jump the front of the engine
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) compartment, near
and a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal the engine oil dipstick.
for that purpose.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located under
the engine compartment
fuse block cover, and
is marked with a plus (+)
symbol on the cover. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
To access the terminal, for more information on the location of the remote
remove the fuse block positive (+) terminal and the engine oil dipstick.
cover.

{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.

5-36
{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
this, and some have been blinded. Use a parts once the engine is running.
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
not need to add water to the battery installed or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
If it is low, add water to take care of that first. basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
If you do not, explosive gas could be present. to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
with water and get medical help immediately. Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-37
 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote the engine for a while.
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 11. Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it entry transmitter to disarm your content
to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. theft-deterrent system.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
has one. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the service.
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
Do not let the other end touch anything until the occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a and remove the jumper cables in the correct
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote order, making sure that the cables do not touch
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the each other or other metal.
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.

5-38
 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-39
All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.

Transfer Case
(Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on

a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.

5-40
Carrier Assembly-Differential To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
(Rear Drive Module)
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
When to Check and Change Lubricant you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. it repaired, if needed.

How to Check Lubricant What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-11.

AWD Differential Case

A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug

5-41
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-44.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
section, contact your dealer.
for more information.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.

2. Remove the three headlamp assembly attachment

screws.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly toward you to release
it from the hidden, lower headlamp mount. The
headlamp assembly will need to be carefully
disengaged from the vehicle.

5-42
 7. Connect the electrical connector.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the headlamp
assembly. When reinstalling the three headlamp
screws, do not overtighten.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps

A. Sidemarker Lamp C. Low/High-Beam/

B. Parking/Turn DRL Headlamp
Signal Lamp
4. Pull the locking tab back on the bulb socket and
push the release tab in to release the wiring
harness. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
to remove it from the headlamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall A. Stoplamp/Taillamp C. Sidemarker Lamp
the socket into the headlamp assembly by turning B. Turn Signal Lamp/ D. Back-Up Lamp
it clockwise. Taillamp

5-43
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-10 for 6. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
more information. 7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly. When reinstalling the screws, do not
overtighten.

Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-Up, Rear Turn Signal, 3157
Stoplamp and Taillamp
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp 194
Front Turn Signal Lamp 5702A
2. Remove the taillamp screws. Low/High-Beam Headlamp/DRL H13
3. Slide the taillamp assembly sideways to disengage
the cross-bar locating studs. For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to disconnect
it from the taillamp assembly.

5-44
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-13.
Here’s how to replace the windshield wiper blades:
1. Make sure the front wipers are turned off.
2. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield. 3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove
it from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip “click” into
place.
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.

5-45
Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement
To replace the rear window wiper blade, do the {CAUTION:
following:
1. Make sure that the rear wiper is off. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
2. Pull the wiper away from the rear window. are dangerous.
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting • Overloading your tires can cause
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the overheating as a result of too much friction.
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove You could have an air-out and a serious
it from the wiper arm. accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-31.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the • Underinflated tires pose the same danger
wiper arm until you hear the release clip “click” as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
into place. could cause serious injury. Check all tires
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure frequently to maintain the recommended
the wiper blade into place. pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-52.
Tires • Overinflated tires are more likely to be
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual. been damaged, replace them.

5-46
Tire Sidewall Labeling (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
Useful information about a tire is molded into its GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall. specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-58.
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this needed to support that load.
section for more detail.

5-47
 (B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
Compact Spare Tire Example (F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or type and service description. The letter T as the
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately first character in the tire size means the tire is for
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven temporary use only.
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-73 GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-62. specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.

5-48
Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
The following illustration shows an example of a typical the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
passenger vehicle tire size. the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States (F) Service Description: These characters represent
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
the first character in the tire size means a passenger index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
and Rim Association. speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

5-49
Tire Terminology and Definitions Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure without passengers and cargo.
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of
kilopascal (kPa). a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer,
air conditioning. production plant, brand and date of production.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
its width. Your Vehicle on page 4-31.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
from steel or other reinforcing materials. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the mounted on a vehicle.
centerline of the tread. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.

5-50
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air on page 5-52 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31.
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the centerline of the tread.
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb beads are seated.
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31. tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an surface. The amount of grip provided.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or with the road.
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
the other sidewall of the tire. called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-55.
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.

5-51
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): Inflation - Tire Pressure
A tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear. Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using effectively.
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
Grading on page 5-58. under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated you can get the following:
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus • Too much flexing
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. • Too much heat

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an • Tire overloading

individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, • Premature or irregular wear
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
• Poor handling
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
• Reduced fuel economy
the original equipment tire size and recommended If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information you can get the following:
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31. • Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards

5-52
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the How to Check
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
your tires when they are cold. The recommended inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
For additional information regarding how much weight 1 mile (1.6 km).
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry. the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
When to Check If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire the tire pressure with the tire gage.
on page 5-73. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.

5-53
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-55 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-60 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
on page 6-4. pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-88.

5-54
 When It Is Time for New Tires
{CAUTION: One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to check the treadwear
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts indicators, which will
appear when your tires
become loose after a time. The wheel could
have only 1/16 inch
come off and cause an accident. When you (1.6 mm) or less of
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from tread remaining. Some
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. commercial truck tires
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a may not have treadwear
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a indicators.
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-62.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.

5-55
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your {CAUTION:
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification while driving. If you mix tires of different
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly,
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the and you could have a crash. Using tires of
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal different sizes, brands, or types may also
use, as the original tires. cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the correct size, brand, and type of tires
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall on all wheels. It is all right to drive with
performance of your vehicle, including brake system your compact spare temporarily, as it was
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and developed for use on your vehicle. See
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec Compact Spare Tire on page 5-73.
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire
manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 5-47 for additional information.

5-56
 Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION: If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
traction control, and electronic stability control, the
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. performance of these systems can be affected.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that

do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they {CAUTION:
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as If you add different sized wheels, your
your vehicle’s original tires.
vehicle may not provide an acceptable level
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on of performance and safety if tires not
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label recommended for those wheels are selected.
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). You may increase the chance that you will
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-31, for more crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
information about the Tire and Loading Information
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
Label and its location on your vehicle.
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-56 and Accessories

and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

5-57
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
section width. For example: conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
The following information relates to the system depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
developed by the United States National Highway however, and may depart significantly from the norm
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. differences in road characteristics and climate.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most Traction – AA, A, B, C
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
While the tires available on General Motors passenger traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
grades, they must also conform to federal safety traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
requirements and additional General Motors Tire cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

5-58
Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested the longest tire life and best overall performance.
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to to one side or the other, the alignment may need to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
level of performance which all passenger car tires must driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of proper diagnosis.
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

5-59
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly {CAUTION:
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). dangerous. It could affect the braking and
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. air and make you lose control. You could have
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying a collision in which you or others could be
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
the same way as the one it replaces. bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
nuts for your vehicle.
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62 for more
information.

5-60
Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains

{CAUTION: {CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
used or how far it has been driven. It could without the proper amount of clearance can
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
to replace a wheel, use a new GM original other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
equipment wheel. tire chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the front tires.

5-61
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, {CAUTION:
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: the appropriate safety equipment and training.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that The jack provided with your vehicle is designed
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. anything else, you or others could be badly
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
Use the jack provided with your vehicle only
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a for changing a flat tire.
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.

5-62
 When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
{CAUTION: wheel blocks.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle

can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not The following information will tell you next how to use
move, you should put blocks at the front and the jack and change a tire.
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

5-63
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire is located under the load floor in the
rear cargo area. You may need to remove the
rear compartment storage panel/cover and/or the table
to access the load floor. See Rear Compartment
Storage Panel/Cover on page 2-37 and Table on
page 2-39 for more information.
To access the spare tire and tools, do the following:

2. Remove the bolt retaining the spare tire.

3. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 5-73 for more information.
4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which are
located on the driver’s side of the rear cargo
area, behind an access door. Pull out the access
door to reach them.

1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the vehicle

and set it aside.

5-64
 5. Remove the wing-bolt Removing the Flat Tire and
on the jack and then
remove it. Installing the Spare Tire
You must take off the wheel cover or hubcap,
if equipped, to reach the wheel bolts.
1. Loosen all five
hex-shaped plastic
caps by turning
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise.
Do not try to
6. Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding remove plastic
the bag containing the wheel wrench. Remove the caps from the cover
wheel wrench from the bag. or center cap.
7. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from
the handle.

2. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.

5-65
 4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and
rotate the wheel wrench clockwise. That will raise
the lift head a little.
5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 6. Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel.
Position the jack head under the metal jacking
flange and not the plastic lower body panel.

5-66
With the jack head positioned correctly on the Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower
metal jacking flange, it should look like this from body panel.
underneath. 7. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

5-67
 {CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.

{CAUTION:
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
ground so there is enough room for the road tire
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without to clear the ground.
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.

5-68
 9. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
10. Remove the flat tire. all the rust or dirt off.

11. Remove any rust or dirt

from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.

5-69
12. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.

{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand

until the wheel is held against the hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle

counterclockwise.

5-70
 15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION: sequence, as shown.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the 16. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
proper torque specification. See Capacities from under the vehicle.
and Specifications on page 5-88 for wheel nut 17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel
torque specification. wrench.
When reinstalling the full plastic covers or center caps on
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead the full-size tire, tighten all five plastic caps hand snug
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid with the aid of the wheel wrench and tighten them with
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel the wheel wrench an additional one-quarter of a turn.
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
page 5-88 for the wheel nut torque specification. spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the cargo
area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

5-71
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire 3. Install the jack in the
left side panel of cargo
and Tools area and secure
with the wing bolt.

{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side of the
Store all these in the proper place.
floor compartment.

To store the flat or spare tire and tools, do the following:

1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.
2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure
the bag to the jack.

5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare

tire bracket. The final position of the wheel stow rod
must be rotated to the farthest forward position.

5-72
 6. Replace the rear compartment storage panel/cover Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a full-size
and/or table load floor over the wheel stow rod tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will last
through the hole in the floor. longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again.
7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on the Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
up through the center hole of the wheel. wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and tighten. get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire
and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
as you can. And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel
with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
Compact Spare Tire spare tire and its wheel together.

Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains
60 psi (420 kPa). on your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your convenience.

5-73
Appearance Care Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s interior,
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle’s
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
doors and windows.
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
interior may experience extremes of heat that could using a small brush with soft bristles.
cause stains to set rapidly. Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle’s
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent glass. Should it become necessary, you can also obtain
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments a product from your GM dealer to remove odors from your
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also vehicle’s upholstery.
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior. Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners or techniques:
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. • Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on remove a soil from any interior surface.
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. • Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.

5-74
 • Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry To clean, use the following instructions:
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water
Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves or club soda.
streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
cleaning. rub toward the center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
soiled.
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc. 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Fabric/Carpet 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment that was used with plain water.
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
For soils, always try to remove them first with plain upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
as much of the soil as possible using one of the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
following techniques: formation may result, clean the entire surface.

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a After the cleaning process has been completed,
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
paper towel until no more can be removed. from the fabric or carpet.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.

5-75
Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to Plastic Surfaces
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
to preserve and protect leather may permanently Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based permanently change the appearance and feel of your
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the or wax-based products, or those containing organic
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather. they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.

5-76
Care of Safety Belts Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry. The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
{CAUTION: keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
it may severely weaken them. In a crash, Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
they might not be able to provide adequate or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
soap and lukewarm water. cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-81.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
Weatherstrips agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11. the vehicle.

5-77
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-77. surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Finish Care
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle possible.
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-81.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive Windshield and Wiper Blades
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
paint finish on your vehicle. wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
paint finish.

5-78
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade on chrome wheels only.
with water. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
replace blades that look worn. chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Aluminum Wheels Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
wheels, you could damage the surface of the or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild carbide tire cleaning brushes.
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
then be applied. brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

5-79
Tires Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
products on your vehicle may damage the paint underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
always wipe off any overspray from all painted protection.
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
Sheet Metal Damage and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or do this for you.
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide Chemical Paint Spotting
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
Finish Damage attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode surface.
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
body and paint shop. whichever occurs first.

5-80
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish scratches, and other light
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior surface contamination.
Wax-Treated polishing cloth. Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax and protects finish.
Tar and Road Removes tar, road oil,
Oil Remover and asphalt. Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine protects in one step.
Chrome Cleaner Use on chrome or Low Gloss
and Polish stainless steel. No wiping necessary.

White Sidewall Removes soil and black Medium foaming

Tire Cleaner marks from whitewalls. Wash Wax shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl. Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Removes dirt, grime,
Glass Cleaner smoke and fingerprints. Quickly removes
Spot Lifter spots and stains from
Removes dirt and grime carpets, vinyl, and
Chrome and Wire from chrome wheels and cloth upholstery.
Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers.
Odorless spray odor
Removes dust, Odor Eliminator eliminator used on fabrics,
Finish Enhancer fingerprints, and surface vinyl, leather and carpet.
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.

5-81
Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.

5-82
Electrical System Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Add-On Electrical Equipment Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until
Some electrical equipment can damage your the problem is fixed.
vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment Fuses and Circuit Breakers
can keep other components from working as
they should. The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the chance
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing problems.
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-61.
There are two fuse blocks — the underhood fuse block,
and the instrument panel fuse block.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy fuse panel door.
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.

5-83
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Fuses Usage
LOCK/MIRROR Door Lock, Power Mirror
CRUISE Cruise Control System
EPS Electric Power Steering
IGN 1 Switches, Instrument Panel Cluster
PRNDL/PWR PRNDL/Powertrain
TRN
BCM (IGN) Body Control Module
AIRBAG Airbag System
Body Control Module,
BCM/ISRVM
Inside Rearview Mirror
TURN Turn Signals
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the center console, to the left HTD SEATS Heated Seats
of the glove box near the floor.
Body Control Module, Heating,
BCM/HVAC Ventilation and Air Conditioning
HZRD Hazard Warning Flashers
RADIO Radio

5-84
 Fuses Usage Engine Compartment Fuse Block
LOCK/MIRROR Door Lock, Power Mirror
PARK Parking Lamps

BCM/CLSTR Body Control Module,

Instrument Panel Cluster
INT LTS/ Interior Lights/OnStar®
ONSTAR®
DR LCK Door Locks

Relays Usage
PARK LAMP Parking Lamps Relay The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and
BLOWER Air Conditioning Blower Motor See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
DR LCK Door Locks Relay
PASS DR Passenger Door Unlock Relay Fuses Usage
UNLOCK
HTD SEATS Heated Seats
DRV DR Driver Door Unlock Relay
UNLCK HVAC Heating, Ventilation,
BLOWER Air Conditioning Blower Control
HEAD LAMP Headlamps

5-85
 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage
HTD SEATS Heated Seats HTD SEATS Heated Seats
PREM AUD Premium Audio System, Amplifier Engine Control Module,
ECM/TCM Transaxle Control Module
ABS PWR Anti-lock Brake System
AUX OUTLETS Accessory Power Outlets
RR WIPER Rear Window Wiper
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
FRT WIPER Front Window Wiper
INJ Fuel Injectors
SUNROOF Sunroof
PWR TRAIN Powertrain
ETC Electronic Throttle Control
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
PWR WDW Power Windows
A/C DIODE Air Conditioning Diode
A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch
TRAILER Trailer Lighting
EMISS Emissions
BRAKE Brake System
ENG IGN Engine Ignition
RH HDLP Passenger’s Side Headlamp
CIGAR Cigarette Lighter
HORN Horn
LH HDLP Driver’s Side Headlamp
BACKUP Back-up Lamps
COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High

5-86
 Fuses Usage Relays Usage
HTD SEATS Heated Seats WIPER Wiper System Relay
SYSTEM
BATT FEED Battery
HORN Horn Relay
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
DRL Daytime Running Lamps Relay
COOL FAN LO Cooling Fan Low
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Relay
RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger
STARTER
ABS Anti-lock Brake System RELAY Starter Relay

FOG LP Fog Lamps REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Relay

IGN Ignition Switch FOG LP Fog Lamp Relay
COOL FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Relay
Relays Usage
A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch Relay
ENG MAIN Engine Relay
RR WIPER Rear Window Wiper Relay Circuit Breaker Usage
FRT WIPER Front Window Wiper Relay POWER
SEATS Power Seats
PWR WDW Power Windows Relay
COOL FAN HI Cooling Fan High Relay

5-87
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

Capacities
Application English Metric
Cooling System 10.5 qt 9.9 L
Engine Oil with Filter 4.0 qt 3.8 L
Fuel Tank 16.6 gal 62.8 L
Transaxle Fluid 4.5 qt 4.2 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap
3.4L V6 F Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

5-88
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
Introduction ...................................................6-2 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-11
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Maintenance Record .....................................6-14
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

6-1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
Introduction vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
change as recommended. affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
for details. drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
Maintenance Requirements other ways.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, Because of all the different ways people use their
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary frequent checks and replacements. So please read
to keep your vehicle in good working condition. the following and note how you drive. If you have any
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
maintenance may not be covered by warranty. see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that: Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench®
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
dealer do these jobs.
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal supported service technicians will perform the work
driving limits.
using genuine GM parts.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane If you want to purchase service information, see Service
on page 5-5. Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be performed when indicated. See Additional should be checked, when to check it, and what you
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
{CAUTION: use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-11 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
you can be seriously injured. Do your own else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
maintenance work only if you have the genuine GM parts.
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have
a qualified technician do the work.

6-3
Scheduled Maintenance When the change engine oil message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
When the change engine oil message comes on, Required services are described in the following
it means that service is required for your vehicle. for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if your second service be Maintenance II, and that
you are driving under the best conditions, the engine you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil may be required more often.
and filter must be changed at least once a year and Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
at this time the system must be reset. Your GM engine oil message comes on within 10 months since
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service technicians the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts performed.
and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset 10 months or more since the last service or if the
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See message has not come on at all for one year.
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

6-4
 Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life system.
• •
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
•
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. See footnote (l).
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-54 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on • •
page 6-9.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
• •
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
• •
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(41 500) (83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •
Inspect exhaust system for loose
• • • • • •
or damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
• • •
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
Change automatic transaxle fluid (severe
• • •
service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid (normal
•
service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires. An Emission Control •
Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
•
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. See •
footnote (m).

6-6
Maintenance Footnotes If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect broken airbag coverings, and have them repaired or
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface replaced. The airbag system does not need regular
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear maintenance.
or cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor
parking brake adjustment. and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and seats, and liftgate hinges. More frequent lubrication may
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts, be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, (g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as filter may require replacement more often.
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test (h) Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year. − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. − When doing frequent trailer towing.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all − Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and service.
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.

6-7
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service Owner Checks and Services
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for These owner checks and services should be performed
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the dependability, and emission control performance of your
cooling system and pressure cap. vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
(j) Check system for interference or binding and for with these checks and services.
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Replace any components that have high effort or Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
control cables. in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired At Each Fuel Fill
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
It is important to perform these underhood checks
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect at each fuel fill.
the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, Engine Oil Level Check
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.

6-8
Engine Coolant Level Check At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. Starter Switch Check
See Engine Coolant on page 5-21 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check {CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the When you are doing this inspection, the
proper fluid if necessary. vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-46 for further brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-22.
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-62. turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
Tire Wear Inspection should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-54.

6-9
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
System Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
{CAUTION: shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
moves, you or others could be injured. is required.

Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room Park (P) Mechanism Check
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-22.
{CAUTION:
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
the vehicle begins to move.
could begin to move. You or others could be
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do injured and property could be damaged. Make
not start the engine. Without applying the regular sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
for service. to move.

6-10
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing Recommended Fluids and
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake. Lubricants
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
With the engine running and transaxle in part number, or specification may be obtained from
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure your dealer.
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Usage Fluid/Lubricant
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding Engine oil which meets GM
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Standard GM6094M and
Then release the parking brake followed by the displays the American Petroleum
regular brake. Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engine Oil Engines starburst symbol.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
is required. the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
Underbody Flushing Service for your vehicle’s engine, see
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any Engine Oil on page 5-13.
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other and use only DEX-COOL®
debris can collect. Engine Coolant water
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-21.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
System or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

6-11
 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Hood Latch
Washer Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Secondary (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Use only T-IV Automatic Latch, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Transmission Fluid Pivots, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Automatic (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
Transaxle in Canada 22689186). Release Pawl
See Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-21. Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinges, Rear (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube Folding Seat in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474). Dielectric Silicone Grease
Weatherstrip (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Carrier Conditioning
in Canada 992887).
Assembly —
Differential
VERSATRAK® Fluid
(Rear Drive (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
Module) in Canada 88901045).
and Transfer
Case (Power
Transfer Unit)

6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 —
Engine Oil Filter 25010792 PF47
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15781507 CF137
Replacement Battery 15104967 75-6YR
Spark Plugs 12568387 41-101
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm) 22703508 —
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm) 22703507 —
Rear – 11 inches (28.0 cm) 89025824 —

6-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-14
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-15
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer Maintenance I or
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading Maintenance II

6-16
 Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4 United States Government ..........................7-14
Customer Assistance for Text Reporting Safety Defects to the
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4 Canadian Government ................................7-15
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4 Reporting Safety Defects to
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6 General Motors .........................................7-15
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6 Service Publications Ordering
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8 Information ...............................................7-15
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders .........................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11

7-1
Customer Assistance and STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
Information resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service the following information available to give the Customer
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best Assistance Representative:
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your available from the vehicle registration or title,
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member and visible through the windshield.
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can • Dealership name and location.
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
or the general manager. concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.

7-2
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
are committed to making sure you are completely toll-free telephone number or write them at the
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue following address:
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure BBB Auto Line Program
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional 4200 Wilson Boulevard
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Suite 800
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for Arlington, VA 22203-1838
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
administered by the Council of Better Business mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle discontinue its participation in this program.
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given
in your case, you may reject it and proceed with
any other venue for relief available to you.

7-3
Online Owner Center Customer Assistance for Text
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership Telephone (TTY) Users
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place. To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
The Online Owner Center allows you to: Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
• Get e-mail service reminders. Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
• Access information about your specific vehicle, (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
Customer Assistance Offices
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule. Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide. to write or e-mail Pontiac, refer to the addresses below.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-4
United States — Customer Assistance Overseas — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172 Mexico, Central America and
www.Pontiac.com Caribbean Islands/Countries
1-800-762-2737 or (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743) Islands) — Customer Assistance
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
From Puerto Rico: Customer Assistance Center
1-800-496-9992 (English) Paseo de la Reforma #2740
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Col. Lomas de Bezares
Fax Number: 313-381-0022 C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
From U.S. Virgin Islands: 01-800-508-0000
1-800-496-9994 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Roadside Assistance Program
Program As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Contact Pontiac’s
Roadside Assistance toll-free at 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743). Roadside Assistance Representatives are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
This program, available to qualified applicants, Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of to you:
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required • Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a ($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
wheelchair/scooter lift. nearest service station.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time • Lock-out Service (identification required):
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more Replacement keys or locksmith service will
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
users, call 1-800-833-9935.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. for warranty service or in the event of a
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

7-6
 • Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be While we hope you never have the occasion to use
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible our service, it is added security while traveling for
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not you and your family. Remember, we are only a
covered by a warrantable failure. phone call away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance:
1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), text telephone (TTY)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a users, call 1-888-889-2438.
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
• Dealer Locator Service reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered Pontiac’s judgement, the claims become excessive
under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However, in frequency or type of occurrence.
when other services are utilized, our Roadside Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
obligations you might incur. Pontiac reserves the right to make any changes or
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance time without notification.
Representative:
Canadian Roadside Assistance
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number. Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
• Telephone number of your location. in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
• Location of the vehicle. Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.

7-7
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options
To enhance your ownership experience, we and Warranty service can generally be completed while you
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Transportation, a customer support program for to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
new vehicles. transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper Shuttle Service
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your service to get you to your destination with minimal
inconvenience during warranty repairs. interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
Scheduling Service Appointments up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you Public Transportation or Fuel
should contact your dealer and request an appointment. Reimbursement
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs, If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service addition, should you arrange transportation through
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem expenses may be available, up to a five-day maximum.
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
let them know this, and ask for instructions. supported by original receipts.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.

7-8
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle contact your dealer for specific information about
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
provider requirements. Requirements vary and Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
may include minimum age requirements, insurance alternative transportation may be available under the
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for your dealer for details.
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair. change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
as a courtesy rental. pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.

7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
Data Recorders conversation of vehicle occupants.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, To read this information, special equipment is needed
has a number of sophisticated computer systems that and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s the data is required. GM will not access information
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle about a crash event or share it with others other than:
computers to monitor emission control components • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the • in response to an official request of police or similar
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information government office,
may be stored during regular operations to facilitate • as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
repair of detected malfunctions; other information discovery process, or
is stored only in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called event data • as required by law.
recorders (EDR). In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the • use the data for GM research needs,
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your
vehicle may record information about the condition of the • make it available for research where appropriate
vehicle and how it was operated, such as data related confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
to engine speed, brake application, throttle position, shown, or
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, • share summary data which is not tied to a specific
airbag performance, and the severity of a collision. vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
This information has been used to improve vehicle purposes.
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.

7-10
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
to the special equipment that can read the information repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
if they have access to the vehicle or the device that that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
stores the data. cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
or manual for information on its operations and
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
data collection.
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
Collision Damage Repair are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified are made by companies other than GM and may
technician using the proper equipment and quality not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
performance can be compromised in subsequent properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
collisions. are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
Collision Parts parts are not covered by that warranty.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.

7-11
Repair Facility If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
facility that meets your needs before you ever need parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians If an Accident Occurs
and comparable equipment.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
Insuring Your Vehicle • Try to relax and then check to make sure you
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
There are significant differences in the quality of is injured.
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. • If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection Do not leave the scene of an accident until
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for all matters have been taken care of. Move your
damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be • Give only the necessary and requested information
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. to police and other parties involved in the accident.
If such insurance coverage is not available from Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
your current insurance carrier, consider switching to frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the
another insurance carrier. accident. This will help guard against post-accident
legal action.

7-12
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside • If possible, call your insurance company from the
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on scene of the accident. They will walk you through
page 7-6 for more information. the information they will need. If they ask for a
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
be necessary. This is especially true if there are
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
information and registration if you keep these
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
items in your vehicle.
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
• Gather the important information you will need from make sure you are comfortable with them.
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license with their work for a long time.
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and make sure you understand what work will be
and policy number, and a general description of
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
the damage to the other vehicle.
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.

7-13
Managing the Vehicle Damage Reporting Safety Defects
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, Reporting Safety Defects to the
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
United States Government
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
Specify to the facility that any required replacement could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new you should immediately inform the National Highway
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by to notifying General Motors.
your GM vehicle warranty.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
your insurance company may initially value the campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with in individual problems between you, your dealer,
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM or General Motors.
parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may
be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
pay the full cost. the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair Washington, D.C. 20590
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision You can also obtain other information about motor
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits vehicle safety from the hotline.
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.

7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Canadian Government General Motors of Canada Limited
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to: Service Publications Ordering
Transport Canada Information
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street Service Manuals
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
Reporting Safety Defects to information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
General Motors
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Case Unit Repair Manual
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write: This manual provides information on unit repair service
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
P.O. Box 33172 transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Detroit, MI 48232-5172

7-15
Service Bulletins Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information Service Publications are available for current and
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE Eastern Time
(1-800-463-7483). For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
Owner’s Information on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner publications are written specifically for owners Or you can write to:
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include Helm, Incorporated
the Maintenance Schedule for all models. P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
and Warranty Booklet.
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-16
 A Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-79
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-77
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-18 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-80
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-78
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-62 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-74
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-75
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-83 Finish Care ................................................. 5-78
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-80
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Airbag Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-76
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-26 Leather ...................................................... 5-76
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) .... 7-10 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-80
Airbag System ................................................ 1-53 Tires .......................................................... 5-80
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-80
Vehicle ................................................... 1-62 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-81
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-59 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-77
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-61 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-77
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-59 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-78
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60 Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-19
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-58 Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-38
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-55 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-79
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-40 Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-81
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-10 Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-80
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-81 Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-81
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .... 3-81 Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-81
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7 Radio with CD .................................... 3-40, 3-50
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-65

1
Audio System(s) (cont.) Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-40 Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-79 and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-42
Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-80 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-44
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-81 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Automatic Door Lock ......................................... 2-8 Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-43
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15 Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-56
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ................................................... 2-19 C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
B Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-88
Battery .......................................................... 5-34 Carbon Monoxide .................... 2-10, 2-25, 4-26, 4-38
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18 Care of
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-27 Safety Belts ................................................ 5-77
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22 Your CD Player ........................................... 3-81
Brake Your CDs ................................................... 3-80
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7 Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-17
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-35
Parking ...................................................... 2-22 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-61
System Warning Light .................................. 3-28 Check
Brakes .......................................................... 5-32 Engine Light ............................................... 3-32
Braking ........................................................... 4-6 Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-80
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-15 Child Restraints
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-42 Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-36
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42 Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33

2
Child Restraints (cont.) Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-42 Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-27
Older Children ............................................. 1-30 Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-73
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-13
Seat Position ........................................... 1-47 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Convenience Net ............................................ 2-40
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-50 Coolant
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40 Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-31
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-81 Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-31
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19 Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-18
Cleaning Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-79 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-78 Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-34
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-75 Customer Assistance Information
Finish Care ................................................. 5-78 Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-74 Customer Assistance for Text
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-76 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Leather ...................................................... 5-76 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Tires .......................................................... 5-80 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-80 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-15
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-77 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-77 Canadian Government .............................. 7-15
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-78 Reporting Safety Defects to the
Climate Control System ................................... 3-19 United States Government ......................... 7-14
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-22 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-22 Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15

3
 D E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14 Electrical System
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-37 Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-83
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2 Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-85
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-7 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-83
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-84
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-83
Door Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-83
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-8 Engine
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-7 Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Locks .......................................................... 2-6 Battery ....................................................... 5-34
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-7 Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-36
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............. 2-8 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-32
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8 Coolant ...................................................... 5-21
Driver Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-18
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-18 Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-31
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3 Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-31
Six-Way Power Seat ...................................... 1-3 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Driving Exhaust ..................................................... 2-25
At Night ..................................................... 4-16 Oil ............................................................. 5-13
City ........................................................... 4-20 Oil Life System ........................................... 5-16
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-25
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3 Overheating ................................................ 5-23
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21 Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-36
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24 Starting ...................................................... 2-17
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17 Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-31 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................ 7-10
Winter ........................................................ 4-26 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30

4
 F Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-85
Filter Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-83
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-84
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-80 Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-83
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-81
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-62
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-62
G
Gage
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-72 Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-31
Fluid Fuel .......................................................... 3-37
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-21 Speedometer .............................................. 3-25
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-31 Tachometer ................................................. 3-25
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-15 Gasoline
Folding Rear Seat ........................................... 1-10 Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Folding Seatback, Passenger ............................. 1-9 Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Gate Ajar Light ............................................... 3-37
Additives ...................................................... 5-6 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-34
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-37
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-8
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Headlamps .................................................... 3-14
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-38
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-42

5
Headlamps (cont.) Instrument Panel (I/P)
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-14 Brightness .................................................. 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8 Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-42 J
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 Jump Starting ................................................. 5-34
On Reminder .............................................. 3-14
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
K
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-37 Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23 Keys ............................................................... 2-2
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10 L
Release ..................................................... 5-11 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-47
Horn ............................................................... 3-6 Lamps
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-18
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17 Cargo ........................................................ 3-17
Dome ........................................................ 3-16
Fog ........................................................... 3-15
I Map ..........................................................
LATCH System
3-17

Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-16 Child Restraints ........................................... 1-42

Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33 Liftgate .......................................................... 2-10
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-52 Light
Instrument Panel Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-26
Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29

6
Light (cont.) Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Battery Warning .......................................... 3-27 Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-38
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28 Low Traction Light .......................................... 3-30
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-36 Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-35
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-37 Lumbar
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-31 Manual Controls ............................................ 1-4
Gate Ajar ................................................... 3-37
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-37
Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-38
Low Traction ............................................... 3-30 M
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-32 Maintenance Schedule
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-35 Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-36 At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-26 At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
Security ..................................................... 3-36 At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-30 Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-30 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Lighting Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Entry ......................................................... 3-17 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-31 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Locks Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-11
Automatic Door Lock ..................................... 2-8 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-7 Using .......................................................... 6-2
Door ........................................................... 2-6 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-32
Power Door .................................................. 2-7 Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-4
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............. 2-8 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-8 Map Lamps .................................................... 3-17

7
Mirrors Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass Outside
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-29 Convex Mirrors ............................................ 2-32
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®, Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-31
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-27 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-25
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-27 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Outside Convex Mirrors ................................ 2-32 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-31
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
P
N Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-23
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-15
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-24
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-22
O Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-25
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-22
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25 Passing ......................................................... 4-14
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13 Passlock® ...................................................... 2-15
Oil Power ............................................................. 1-3
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-36 Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-18
Engine ....................................................... 5-13 Door Locks .................................................. 2-7
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-35 Electrical System ......................................... 5-83
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-16 Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-36
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30 Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-17
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4 Windows .................................................... 2-12
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-32 Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-29
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ................. 2-8

8
 Q Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-17 Spare Tire .................................................. 5-65
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-64
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-44
R Reporting Safety Defects
Radios .......................................................... 3-38 Canadian Government .................................. 7-15
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-81 General Motors ........................................... 7-15
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-80 United States Government ............................ 7-14
Radio with CD .................................... 3-40, 3-50 Restraint System Check
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-65 Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-62
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-40 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-79 After a Crash .......................................... 1-63
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-80 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-17
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ............ 2-37 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-25
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-8 Roadside
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-27 Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-25 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-31
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10 Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-26
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-29
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
S
Safety Belt
Display ...................................................... 2-27
Pretensioners .............................................. 1-29
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-27
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-26
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-5
Safety Belts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-11
Care of ...................................................... 5-77
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-36
Driver Position ............................................ 1-18
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-36
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-17
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3

9
Safety Belts (cont.) Service (cont.)
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-17 California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................... 1-27 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-25 Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-32
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-25 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-61
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24 Setting the Time ............................................. 3-40
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-12 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-80
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-24 Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-23
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-24
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-24
Seatback, Folding Passenger ............................. 1-9 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Seats Spare Tire
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3 Compact .................................................... 5-73
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-8 Installing .................................................... 5-65
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4 Removing ................................................... 5-64
Manual ........................................................ 1-2 Storing ....................................................... 5-72
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-4 Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-88
Passenger Folding Seatback ........................... 1-9 Speedometer .................................................. 3-25
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-5 Split Folding Rear Seat .................................... 1-10
Six-Way Power Driver .................................... 1-3 Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-17
Split Folding Rear Seat ................................ 1-10 Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Securing a Child Restraint Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-79
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-47 Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50 Storage Areas
Security Light ................................................. 3-36 Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-35
Service ........................................................... 5-3 Convenience Net ......................................... 2-40
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-34
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Glove Box .................................................. 2-34
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-35

10
Storage Areas (cont.) Tires (cont.)
Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ......... 2-37 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-62
Table ......................................................... 2-39 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-52
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30 Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-54
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-12 Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-65
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-40 Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-65
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-64
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-72
T Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-50
Table ............................................................ 2-39 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-58
Tachometer .................................................... 3-25 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-59
Taillamps Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-60
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-43 When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-55
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-30 Towing
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-79 Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-36
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-13 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-38
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-13 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-36
Passlock® ................................................... 2-15 Traction
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7 Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Tires ............................................................. 5-46 Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-30
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-79 Low Light ................................................... 3-30
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-56 Transaxle
Chains ....................................................... 5-61 Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-62 Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-19
Cleaning .................................................... 5-80 Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-73 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Different Size .............................................. 5-57 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

11
 U Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-59
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-80 Different Size .............................................. 5-57
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-58 Replacement ............................................... 5-60
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-11
V Power ........................................................ 2-12
Vehicle Windshield
Control ........................................................ 4-5 Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-31
Loading ...................................................... 4-31 Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-45
Symbols ......................................................... iv Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-78
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-83
Recorders .................................................. 7-10 Wipers ......................................................... 3-8
Vehicle Identification Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-82 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-82
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22
Visors ........................................................... 2-12 X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-81
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
Warnings
Y
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv

12